Home

ECOSYS M6026cdn ECOSYS M6526cdn

1. Handle the charger sections with care They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric AN shock if handled improperly 2 CAUTION Wear safe clothing If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties make sure they are safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine Keep away from chains and belts Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot A Check that the fixing unit thermistor heat and press rollers are clean Dirt on them can cause abnormally high temperatures acr eae tac erede de epe cde ee np acd d Do not remove the ozone filter if any from the copier except for routine replacement Do not pull the AC power cord connector wires on high voltage components when removing them always hold the plug itself Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped If necessary protect it with a cable cover or other appropriate Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks aD Remove toner complete
2. Cassette paper feed section 9 MP tray paper feed section 10 Paper conveying section 11 Laser scanner unit KM 12 Laser scanner unit CY 13 Drum unit K 14 Drum unit M 15 Drum unit C Figure 1 1 5 Drum unit Y Developing unit K Developing unit M Developing unit C Developing unit Y Toner container section Primary transfer section 1 1 10 17 18 19 20 Secondary transfer Separa tion sections Fuser section Eject Feed shift sections Duplex section Image scanner unit Document processor 2PV 2PW 1 2 1 Installation environment 1 Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F 2 Humidity 15 to 80 RH 3 Power supply 120 V AC 9A 220 240V AC 5A 4 Power source frequency 50 Hz 2 60 Hz 2 5 Installation location Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sun light or other strong light when removing paper jams Avoid locations subject to high temperature and high humidity or low temperature and low humidity an abrupt change in the environmental temperature and cool or hot direct air Avoid places subject to dust and vibrations Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine Place the machine on a level surface maximum allowance inclination 1 Avoid air borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor such as merc
3. 6 8 8 v 345999 HSd99 NO caLOWOS s CO CN o x Q x Q OR DADO TTTT TT THT TT ON QN C CO CO 2 4 20 KYOCERA Document Solutions America Inc Headquarters 225 Sand Road Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 USA Phone 1 973 808 8444 Fax 1 973 882 6000 Latin America 8240 NW 52nd Terrace Dawson Building Suite 100 Miami Florida 33166 USA Phone 1 305 421 6640 Fax 1 305 421 6666 KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada Ltd 6120 Kestrel Rd Mississauga ON L5T 1S8 Canada Phone 1 905 670 4425 Fax 1 905 670 8116 KYOCERA Document Solutions Mexico S A de C V Calle Arquimedes No 130 4 Piso Colonia Polanco Chapultepec Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo Distrito Federal C P 11560 M xico Phone 52 555 383 2741 Fax 52 555 383 7804 KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil Ltda Alameda Africa 545 Polo Empresarial Consbras Tambor Santana de Parna ba SP CEP 06543 306 Brazil Phone 55 11 4195 8496 Fax 55 11 4195 6167 KYOCERA Document Solutions Australia Pty Ltd Level 3 6 10 Talavera Road North Ryde N S W 2113 Australia Phone 61 2 9888 9999 Fax 61 2 9888 9588 KYOCERA Document Solutions New Zealand Ltd Ground Floor 19 Byron Ave
4. V SOA v1vqaa 6 52 CS82A DRPWB Y uaAasvia 1933 DRRPWB cV V9A OL LOA 8 LOA 9 LOA C V9A udAasvia v1vaaa 19354 uas vela uawasvera 10 MOTRDYN SPEEDSEL MOTCLK MOTEN OL VEDA 8 VEDA 9 VEDA V VEDA c VEDA Figure 2 1 8 Drum section block diagram 2 1 8 2PV 2PW 2 1 3 Developing section The developing unit consists of the sleeve roller that forms the magnetic brush the magnet roller the develop ing blade and the developing screws that agitate the toner Also the toner sensor TS checks whether or not toner remains in the developing unit Figure 2 1 9 Developing section 1 Sleeve roller 6 Developer case 2 Magnet roller 7 Upper developer cover 3 Developing screw A 8 Developer base 4 Developing screw B 9 Sleeve cover 5 Developing blade 10 Toner sensor TS 2 1 9 2PV 2PW HVPWB 214 6 v S a 2 y seiq joubew i W 5214 e ee s V 2 S E e IN seig 3euBe u k d Ss f 2 serq N Pl 9 serq 3euBe u 214 6 V 20 4 A serq joubew Es Developing Developing Developing Developing unit K unit unit
5. 1 4 50 2 3 U008XX error code table Page transmission 1 4 50 2 4 U009XX error code table Page reception 1 4 50 2 5 U010XX error code table G3 2 1 4 51 2 6 U011XX error code table reception 1 4 52 2 7 U017XX error code table V 34 transmission 1 4 53 2 8 U018XX error code table V 34 1 4 53 1 5 Assembly and disassembly 1 5 1 Precautions for assembly and 1 5 1 CT PreCautions sue cete et eee enden ene 1 5 1 PANIS 1 5 1 3 TOMGR 4 E 1 5 1 4 How to tell a genuine Kyocera toner 1 5 2 125 2 Outer COVOrS 2 5 dni b oeil TU rite pope ics 1 5 3 1 Detaching and refitting the rear upper cover right upper cover left upper cover and front 2 220 1 5 3 2 Detaching and refitting the right rear cover right cover and right lower cover 1 5 6 3 Detaching and refitting the left rear cover left cover and left lower cover 1 5 9 4 Detaching and refitting the inner 1 5 11 1 5 3 Paper feed
6. Paper conveying unit Figure 1 5 145 1 5 89 2PV 2PW 2 Detaching and refitting the operation panel Procedure Operation panel 1 Release four hooks and then remove the operation panel 2 Remove the FFC from connector 3 Check or replace the operation panel and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 146 1 5 90 2PV 2PW 3 Detaching and refitting the power source inlet Procedure 1 Remove the power source PWB see page 1 5 29 2 Remove the connector and release the hook and then remove the right fan motor Right fan motor Figure 1 5 147 3 Remove the screw of the grounding wire Figure 1 5 148 1 5 91 2PV 2PW 4 Remove the screw and two terminals 2 then remove the power source inlet Terminal Figure 1 5 149 5 Check or replace the power source inlet Power source inlet and refit all the removed parts Before mounting the AC inlet on the main unit twist the wires 5 to 7 turns lf Five to seven times twist Figure 1 5 150 1 5 92 2PV 2PW 4 Direction of installing the principal fan motors When detaching or refitting the fan motors be careful of the airflow direction intake or exhaust Controller fan motor Rating label Inside Right fan motor Rating label Inside Ef Left fan motor Ratin
7. 1 5 41 Engine PWB Figure 1 5 62 Remove the developing fan unit see page 1 5 38 Fuser pressure Remove three screws drive unit Release two hooks remove the fuser pressure drive unit Check or replace the fuser pressure drive unit and refit all the removed parts 1 5 42 Figure 1 5 63 2PV 2PW 5 Detaching and refitting the middle transfer drive unit Procedure 1 Remove the intermediate transfer unit see page 1 5 22 2 Remove the rear upper cover right upper cover left upper cover and front cover see page 1 5 3 3 Remove the left rear cover and left cover see page 1 5 9 4 Remove the fuser pressure drive unit see page 1 5 41 5 Remove connector YC15 from engine PWB Engine PWB 2PV 2PW Engine PWB Figure 1 5 64 1 5 43 2PV 2PW 6 Remove the screw and then remove the ID guide 7 Remove three screws and then remove the middle transfer drive unit 8 Check or replace the middle transfer drive unit and refit all the removed parts A Figure 1 5 66 1 5 44 1 5 10 Optical section 1 De
8. 1 5 35 5 Detaching and refitting the FAX control PWB 4 in 1 model with FAX only 1 5 36 1 5 9 0 sz eee eedem iM e 1 5 37 1 Detaching and refitting the MP feed drive 1 5 37 2 Detaching and refitting the drum developing drive 1 5 38 3 Detaching and refitting the paper feed drive 1 5 40 4 Detaching and refitting the fuser pressure drive unit 1 5 41 5 Detaching and refitting the middle transfer drive 1 5 43 2PV 2PW 2 135 10 Optical S Cton oco e ttp rr n RT 1 5 45 1 Detaching and refitting the laser scanner 1 5 45 2 Detaching and refitting the scanner 1 5 48 3 Detaching and refitting the image scanner 1 5 52 1 5 11 Document 1 5 78 1 Detaching and refitting the document eene 1 5 78 2 Detaching and refitting the DP paper feed pulley 1 5 82 3 Detaching and refitting the DP separation 1 5 86 4 Detaching and refitting the DP drive 1 5 87 T 5 12 OES m 1 5 88 1 Detaching and
9. Drum PWB M DRPWB M N Drum PWB C DRPWB C Drum PWB DRPWB Y Developing PWB K DEVPWB k Developing PWB DEVPWB M Developing PWB DEVPWB C Developing PWB Y DEVPWB Y APC PWB K APCPWB k APC PWB M APCPWB M APC PWB C APCPWB C APC PWB Y APCPWB Y PD PWB K PDPWB k N N N N N PD PWB PDPWB M PD PWB PDPWB C PD PWB Y PDPWB Y CCD PWB CCDPWB LED PWB LEDPWB LED driver PWB LEDDRPWB N N N N N c Fax control PWB FCPWB PARTS FAX UNIT J SP 2 2 3 2PV 2PW 2 Switches and sensors Machine right Machine inside Machine left Figure 2 2 2 Switches and sensors 1 Main power switch MSW Turns ON OFF the AC power source 2 Interlock switch ILSW Shuts off 24 V DC power line when the inner tray and rear cover are opened 3 Cassette size switch CSSW Detects the paper size dial setting of the paper setting dial 4 Paper sensor Detects the presence of paper in the cassette 5 Lift sensor _5 Detects activation of upper limit of the bottom plate 6 Registration sensor RS Controls t
10. Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting the V 34 symbol speed 3429 Hz Sets if the V 34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description On V 34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used Off V 34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set 1 3 61 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U633 Setting the number of times of DIS signal reception Sets the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice Used as one of the correction measures for transmission errors and other problems 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description Once Responds to the first signal Twice Responds to the second signal Initial setting Once 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting the reference for RTN signal output Sets the error line rate as the reference for RTN signal output If transmission errors occur fre quently due to the quality of the line they can be reduced by lowering this setting 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description 596 Error line rate of 596 10 Error line rate of 10 15 Error line rate of 15 20 Error line rate of 20 Initial setting 15 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key T
11. Dirty contact glass Clean the contact glass Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum surface refreshing see page 1 3 93 Flawed drum Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 21 Deformed or worn cleaning blade in the drum unit Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 21 Flawed developing roller Replace the developing unit see page 1 5 19 Dirty heat roller and press roller Clean the heat roller and press roller 11 The leading edge of image begins to print too early or too late Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Paper feed clutch or registra tion clutch operating incor rectly 12 Paper is wrinkled Print example Causes Check the installation of the clutch If it operates incor rectly replace it Check procedures corrective measures Paper curled Check the paper storage conditions Paper damp Check the paper storage conditions 1 4 32 13 Offset occurs Print example Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures Defective drum surface charg ing Perform the drum surface refreshing see page 1 3 93 When the problem is not cleared increase the surface potential by performing the main charger adjustment see page 1 3 94 Deformed or worn cleaning blade in the drum unit Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 21 Defect
12. 1 3 12 Item No Description 2PV 2PW U004 Setting the machine number Description Sets or displays the machine number Purpose To check or set the machine number Method 1 Press the start key If the machine serial number of engine PWB matches with that of main PWB Display Description Machine No Displays the machine serial number If the machine serial number of engine PWB does not match with that of main PWB Display Description Machine No Main Displays the machine serial number of main Machine No Eng Displays the machine serial number of engine Setting Carry out if the machine serial number does not match 1 Press Execute 2 Press the start key Writing of serial No starts Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 13 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U010 Set Mainte ID Description Maintenance mode ID for markets is changed Purpose The brittleness of a security function is improved by changing maintenance mode ID for markets Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set Display Description Change Maintenance mode ID for markets is changed Initialize Maintenance mode ID for markets is initialized Setting Change 1 Select the New ID Reconfirm 2 New ID is inputted using a ten key New ID of 8 figures is taken
13. esci 17 16 17 16 EPWB 7 7 5 sekso 15 14 15 14 o 6 6 7 ssp 12 12 13 2 LL 8 9 1140 11 10 2 Serial 5 5 cser 10 11 SBSYIEGIRN gg DDR Memory 4 4 4848 VSYNC HEATRE2 55 76 212 I2CSDA 14 15 HEATRE1 RELAY 5 4 5 4 3 3V1 MFP ZCROSS EGHOLD 1 1 16 17 3 2 3 2 Serial 18 TCOVOPN 1 1 YC41 YC42 1 _ YC29 YC17 YC12 YC10 K NMOTNORNADETACY ed FON ies Serce lt lt Is 25 5588688565525 EI a amp a 8 gt 2151219 xolos uo ul lt lt 916 lt 6 5121216155 2 5 1 12 Sz eese eu Sz oj ojo eju o a 24 2 amp amp gt gt gt gt ale lt lt a z zio alzzziza a a a o o u u ui 212 2 OO OOO 2 98997398 91219 8 NOMOTMONAMROTAN galg NOMOTMONAMDOTN SRAN NOT NO 1 IE Nuxooo amp amp amp z 22 i CSSW RFID PWB Primary transfer Cleaning 102 zT NEUTRAL 212 11 1 1 1 YC101 xm ch 1 1 LIVE RELAY ml 2 2 NEUTRAL Heat roller 2 4 17 2PV 2PW yet 1
14. eee 7 Paper Jam Log Count 11 Counter Log Event Descriprions Data and Time 1876543 166554 4988 4988 1103 1103 1027 1027 1027 1027 0501 01 08 01 01 4020 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4020 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4020 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4020 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4020 01 08 01 01 2013 03 02 11 11 2013 03 02 10 57 2013 03 02 10 44 2013 03 02 10 00 2013 03 02 09 27 2013 03 01 17 30 2013 03 01 10 02 2013 03 01 08 57 2013 02 29 17 00 2013 02 29 15 38 f 10100 J0105 J0106 J0110 J0111 J0512 J0513 J0518 J0519 J1020 9 0000 C0001 C0002 C0003 C0004 C0005 C0006 C0007 C0008 0009 0 05 999 0010 0011 406 101 08 01 017 2013 02 28 09 00 44201 36 013 02 28 08 12 44202 44203 44208 44209 d 8 Service Call Log Count Service Code 1881214 01 6000 178944 01 2100 5296 01 4000 5295 01 6000 2099 01 2100 1054 01 4000 809 01 6000 30 01 2100 9 Maintenance Log Count Item 3 104511 01 00 2 3454 01 01 1 34 01 01 10 Unknown toner Log Count Item 3454 01 00 3454 01 00 406 01 00 32 01 00 Data and Time 2013 03 02 11 11 2013 03 02 10 57 2013 03 02 10 44 2013 03 02 10 00 2013 03 02 09 27 2013 03 01 17 30 2013 03 01 10 02 2013 03 01 08 57 gt NO Data and Time 2013 03 02 11 11 2013 03 02 10 57 20
15. Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 30 Polygon motor KM error The polygon motor KM ready input is not given for 10 s dur ing the polygon motor is ON Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Laser scanner unit KM and engine PWB YC31 Defective polygon motor KM Replace the laser scanner unit KM see page 1 5 45 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Polygon motor CY error The polygon motor CY ready input is not given for 10 s dur ing the polygon motor is ON Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Laser scanner unit CY and engine PWB YC31 Defective polygon motor CY Replace the laser scanner unit CY see page 1 5 45 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Laser output error black The pin photo signal is not output from PD PWB K for one second while laser is emitted Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none
16. Figure 2 1 14 Laser scanner unit LSU 1 Polygon motor PM 6 Mirror B 2 Polygon mirror 7 Mirror C 3 f 0 lens A 8 LSU dust shield glass 4 f 0 lens B 9 LSU spiral 5 Mirror A 2 1 14 2PV 2PW ZL 8EDA NOGA lt v 01 8 2A iaa NO8N3 8 8 9A 5 NO8NO1 lt LNNO 1Od LNAGY10d NOR 5 LX 1910d NWdd PIIA S 12A INJ3A TEIA NINGd T eo S 9 22 ZL OVOA LL OVDA L 156dA Z ZOA ree NOdd Z0A NO8N3 8 0 birds amp SIDA NOSNO1 eg i ONNO710d NAOUN 0 1910d dAOGA gt v OVOA NAGd 1 57 1 amp 0 an 5 E gt lt NASN3 NASNO1 22 G LEDA DV LEDA LEDA VL LEDSA 1 1 2A ZL LEDA LL LEDA OL LEDA 6 LEDA 8 LEDA G ZEDA V CEDA c 9A VL ZEDA EL ZEDA CL ZEDA OL ZEDA 6 ZEDA 8 ZEDA Z V 9 9A EPWB LSUMOTA B 15 Laser scanner unit block diagram 1 Figure 2 2 1 15 2PV 2PW 2 1 5 Transfer Separation section The transfer separation section consists of the intermediate transfer unit section and the secondary transfer roller section 1 In
17. Supported original types Sheet originals Original sizes Maximum A4 Legal Minimum A5 Statement Original weights Simplex 50 to 120 g m Duplex 50 to 110 g m Loading capacity 50 sheets 50 to 80 g m or less Dimensions W x D x H 490 x 338 x 104 mm 19 5 16 x 13 5 16 x 4 1 8 Weight Printer 3 kg 6 6 Ib or less Specifications Simplex Printing speed 4 26 sheets min Letter 28 sheets min Legal 23 sheets min AS B5 A6 28 sheets min Up to 15 images 5 5 14 sheets min 16 images or subsequent ones Duplex A4 13 sheets min Letter 13 sheets min Legal 12 sheets min First print time A4 feed from cassette B W 9 0 less Color 10 0 s or less Excluding time for system stabilization immediately after turning on the main power Resolution 600 dpi Operating system Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows XP Professional Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition Windows Vista x86 Edition Windows Vista x64 Edition Windows 7 x86 Edition Windows 7 x64 Edition Windows 8 x86 Edition Windows 8 x64 Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 x64 Edition Windows Server 2012 x64 Edition Apple Macintosh OS 9 x Apple Macintosh OS X Ver 10 5 or more Interface USB interface connector 1 USB Hi speed USB host 2 Network interface 1 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T Page descript
18. 3 March 2014 Contents Correction page numbers of contents 1 1 2 Correction Power source Rated input 1 3 42 1 3 43 1 3 45 to 47 Changed Parts number of original 1 3 48 1 3 49 Correction Changed the procedure 1 3 83 to 89 Correction Addition and deletion of the items 1 4 42 to 46 Correction Error code 1 6 1 Added Safe Update 1 6 2 Correction SD card USB memory 2 3 13 2 3 15 to 19 Correction Arrangement and the number of the connector 2 4 1 Added Exchange time of MK 2 4 2 Added Comment to 2 Repetitive defects gauge This page is intentionally left blank Safety precautions This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of their customers their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities Safety warnings and precautions Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent damage to their property These symbols are described below DANGER High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol A WARNING Serious bodily
19. Cassette PWB CPWB Interconnects the engine PWB and each electrical component cassette section Drum PWB DRPWAB K Relays wirings from electrical components on the drum unit K Drum individual information in EEPROM storage Drum PWB M DRPWB M Relays wirings from electrical components on the drum unit M Drum individual information in EEPROM storage Drum PWB C DRPWB C Relays wirings from electrical components on the drum unit C Drum individual information in EEPROM storage Drum PWB Y DRPWAB Y Relays wirings from electrical components on the drum unit Y Drum individual information in EEPROM storage Developing PWB DEVPWB K Relays wirings from electrical components on the developing unit K Developing PWB M DEVPWB M Relays wirings from electrical components on the developing unit M Developing PWB C DEVPWB C Relays wirings from electrical components on the developing unit C Developing PWB Y DEVPWB Y Relays wirings from electrical components on the developing unit Y APC PWB APCPWAB K Generates and controls the laser beam black PWB M APCPWB M Generates and controls the laser beam magenta APC PWB C APCPWB C Generates and controls the laser beam cyan APC PWB Y APCPWB Y Ge
20. Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF main PWB YC3 and engine PWB YC33 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Defective PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB Refer to the ser vice manual for the paper feeder Developing motor error The developing motor ready input is not given for 5 s dur ing the main motor is ON Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Developing motor and engine PWB YC14 Defective drive transmission sys tem of the develop ing motor Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective develop ing motor Replace the developing motor Defective engine PWB 1 4 13 Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Contents Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures Drum motor error The drum motor ready input is not given for 5 s during the drum motor is ON Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti n
21. ECM reception is enabled ECM reception is disabled Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting the frequency of the CED signal Sets the frequency of the CED signal Used as one of the measures to improve transmission per formance for international communications 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description 2100 1100 2100 Hz 1100 Hz Initial setting 2100 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 59 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U632 Setting communication control 3 Description Makes settings for fax transmission regarding the communication Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set using the cursor up down keys Display Description DIS 4Byte Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes Num OF CNG F T Sets the CNG detection times in the fax telephone auto select mode Setting the DIS signal to 4 bytes Sets if bit 33 and later bits of the DIS DTC signal are sent 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description On Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS DTC signal are not sent Off Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS DTC signal are sent Initial setting Off 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting the CNG detection
22. Not used YC10 1 GND Ground Connectedto 2 TNSENC Analog TS C detection voltage 2 3 3 3V2 O 33VDC 3 3 V DC power to DEVPWB C 4 Not used YC13 1 GND Ground Connectedto 2 TNSENY Analog TS Y detection voltage A 3 3 3V2 3 33V DC 3 3 V DC power to DEVPWB Y 4 Not used 2 3 22 2PV 2PW 2 3 5 DP drive PWB Figure 2 3 5 DP drive PWB silk screen diagram 2 3 23 Connector Connected to main PWB MOTA1 MOTB1 MOTA2 MOTB2 24V2 GND 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 24 V DC 2PV 2PW Description DPPFM drive control signal DPPFM drive control signal DPPFM drive control signal DPPFM drive control signal 24 V DC power from MPWB Ground Connected to DP open close sen Sor DP origi nal sensor and DP tim ing sensor 3 3V2 GND OPSWN 3 3V2 GND ORGSWN 3 3V2 GND TIMSWN 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to DPOCS Ground DPOCS On Off 3 3 V DC power to DPOS Ground DPOS On Off 3 3 V DC power to DPTS Ground DPTS On Off Connected to DP paper feed motor DPMOT1A DPMOT2A DPMOT1B DPMOT2B 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse DPPFM drive control signal DPPFM drive control signal DPPFM drive control signal DPPFM drive control signal YC4 Connect
23. YC39 08 3 YC30 28 5 Ji E ais 5 9 us gt Fo U6 U5 1 U4 1 5 gt L 1 s J U2 YC2 g o rk gt U7 YC34 om gt 3 YC27 a 19 2 YC174 1 2c d lt N L 3 1 0 Figure 2 3 2 Engine PWB silk screen diagram 2 3 3 Connector Connected to MP feed clutch paper feed clutch paper feed motor middle clutch and registration clutch Signal MPFCLDRN 24V3 FEDCLDRN 24V3 N C FEMOTRDYN FEMOTCLK FEMOTREN GND 24V3 MIDCLDRN 24V3 REGCLDRN 24V3 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 2PV 2PW Description MPFCL On Off 24 V DC power to MPFCL PFCL On Off 24 V DC power to PFCL Not used PFM ready signal PFM clock signal PFM On Off Ground 24 V DC power to PFM MCL On Off 24 V DC power to MCL RCL On Off 24 V DC power to RCL Connected to MP solenoid 24V3 MPSOLDRN 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC power to MPSOL MPSOL On Off YC6 Connected to ID sensor 1 VOSL VOPL GND LEDREFL 3 3V2 Analog Analog Analog 3 3 V DC IDS1 detection signal IDS1 detection signal Ground IDS1 control signal 3 3 V DC power to IDS1 Connected to ID sensor 2 a BR Alo aA WD gt VOSR VOPR GND LEDREFR 3 3V2 Analog Analog Analog 3 3
24. Hook Figure 1 5 24 4 Open the conveying lower cover N Conveying lower cover Figure 1 5 25 1 5 17 2PV 2PW 5 Remove two screws and then remove the MP paper feed lower unit MP paper feed lower unit e 6 Pull the hook forward and then slide the MP feed shaft 7 Remove the MP paper feed roller 8 Check or replace the Mp paper feed roller and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 27 1 5 18 2PV 2PW 1 5 4 Developing section 1 Detaching and refitting the developing unit Procedure 1 Remove the intermediate transfer unit see page 1 5 22 2 Remove drum units K M C Y 3 Pinch the lever of developing unit 5 a 9 gt 4 Remove developing units K Y Figure 1 5 28 1 5 19 5 Check or replace the developing unit and refit all the removed parts NOTE Remove the cap before installing the new developing unit When reinstalling the developing unit press it down until the lever of developing unit is engaged with the notch If it is difficult to engage the lever press the unit down while rotating the gear to engage it 2PV 2PW New developing unit Figure 1 5 29 1 5 20 2PV 2PW 1 5
25. Setting the IC card type Description Sets the type of IC card Purpose To change the type of IC card Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the cursor up down keys Display Description Other The type of IC card is SSFC SSFC The type of IC card is not SSFC Initial setting Other 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 29 Item No Description 2PV 2PW U250 Setting the maintenance cycle Description Displays clears and changes the maintenance cycle Purpose To check and change the maintenance cycle Method 1 Press the start key The currently set maintenance cycle is displayed Setting 1 Select M Cnt A using the cursor up down keys 2 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys Description Setting range Initial setting Maintenance cycle 0 to 9999999 200000 3 Press the start key The value is set Clearing 1 Select Clear using the cursor up down keys 2 Press the start key The count is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 30 Item No Description 2PV 2PW U251 Checking clearing the maintenance count Description Displays clears and changes the maintenance count Purpose To check the main
26. YC9 18 MPFJAM YC3 1 MPFCLDRN 6 FEMOTRDYN 5 YC3 7 FEMOTCLK YC3 8 FEMOTREN 3 Figure 2 1 6 Paper conveying section block diagram 2 1 6 2PV 2PW 2 1 2 Drum section The drum section consists of the drum the charger roller unit and the cleaning unit and the drum surface is uniformly charged in preparation for formation of residual image by laser beam After transfer is complete toner remaining on the drum surface is chipped off with the cleaning blade and is collected to the waste toner box with the drum screw The cleaning lamp CL consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before main charging Figure 2 1 7 Drum section 1 Drum 5 Drum frame 2 Charger roller 6 Cleaning blade 3 Charger cleaning roller 7 Drum screw 4 Charger case 8 Cleaning lamp CL 2 1 7 2PV 2PW HVPWB el Re 979 O s ova 79 9 gt 2 E uvm X 41944 7 8 9A Selah ase 22225 ova 62 c 0 FEJA IN A udwasvsa 9A lt 31233 C EDA Hdo3svui 79 s brisa 9 oval 79 2 0 9 yy a udo3svai VOA 31233 CYA Drum unit Y A
27. 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 24 V DC power to DEVM Ground DEVM On Off DEVM clock signal DEVM ready signal DEVM drive switch signal Connected to fuser motor IMAMOT RDYN IMAMOTCLK IMAMOTREN GND 24V3 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 24 V DC FUM ready signal FUM clock signal FUM On Off Ground 24 V DC power to FUM Connected to MP paper sensor 3 3V2_LED1 GND MPFPAP 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 2 3 7 3 3 V DC power to MPPS Ground MPPS On Off Connector Signal Voltage 2PV 2PW Description YC17 Connected to cassette size switch CAS2 CAS1 COM CASO 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC CSSW SW2 On Off CSSW SW1 On Off Ground CSSW 0 On Off YC18 Connected to registration sensor N gt 3 3V2 LED2 GND REGPAP 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to RS Ground RS On Off YC19 Connected to eject PWB PDIRN 3 3V2 FTHERM FUSPAP NC GND 0 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC Analog 0 3 3 V DC EVSW On Off 3 3 V DC power to EJPWB FTH detection voltage ES On Off Not used Ground Connected to toner con tainer sensor and waste toner cover sensor 3 3V2 LED3 GND TCONTN 3 3V2 GND WSTOPN 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to TCS Ground TCS On Off 3 3 V DC power to WTCS Ground WTCS On Off Y
28. 9 RC Ry E as Gee 1 GND 111 TNSENY 2 2 gt evloping uni oT ON NE Som nontaone a 2 dis C O FINNS zc gt I iL n 2 4 19 2PV 2PW 590 z 2 51 2 e N NO CAE E NMSdO CAE E NMS9O NMSINI L 1900444 YC6 10595 TOSASY DPDPWB o 100444 JOSA3H N OS3Hd N IOS IH3H NM SdO NMS9HO NMSWIL CAE E sf 10 OM OD QN sf 10 ORM OD ca8lON cVLOW V8 LON sf CO QN o 47 L vl SL lOSHddd sr CO QN N IOS THH N IOS3SHd 9 10 9 1 VeZLOWdd VLLOWdd SA NMSdH 1 AN9 L c v S YC1 c LEDDRPWB 1 1 2 2 CN2 ANODE CATHODE N 1 2 LEDPWB NO DT gt CCD sensor CCDPWB cVLOWOS La LOWOS LWLOWOS LVLOW 9b SACL ON LAG 9c SVLVdd99 S8vivadaoo QN9 pa ZL 9L ON cL NMSdH SAE E vl ON L ps
29. 1 GND GND z B 7 VREFK APCPWB K 3 LONBKN i PDKN 3 PDKN T EXC we y VDOKP GND E VREFM E PDMN 2 m vei le 1 2 2 LONBMN 7 APCPWB M 33 ale ENBMN 1 1 GND gt PDMN z PDPWB M PDMN e t 11 4 POLCLK1 POLRDYN1 E EPWB 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 1 111 GND PEFC APCPWB C 3 3 3 3 3 E PDCN VDOCN VDOCP 3 3V1 GND DBTXD VREFY SERA 3 3V3 eats PDYN sle ER VDOMYN vea 7 7 VDOYP LONBYN APCPWB Y ale 1 10110 3 3V1 2 LSUTHERMY 44 11 SWCLK YC41 SWDIO ALL nav RESETN GND POLCLKO POLRDYNO i POLONNO cup 14 14 2413 15 15 16116 2 4 18 2PV 2PW Devloping unit K 4 DUM PFM 1 a g p 3 x z 1 1 NO WN 0 2 EECLK DRPWB K Not ERASE DR 3 3 ERASE DR 5 5 s a 3 3V2 6 6 ERASE DR DAO 7 7 EEPROM DA1 8 DA1 1 gt Drum unit i N 2 gt Pe ner um eru RU a UV hg PUE a REN ENS a z Fa gt Zz 9 88 M N X i x lt amp S 111 n 5555 lo olo e 25 fell
30. 2 Defective clutch Replace the registration clutch Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 27 12 Middle clutch does not operate Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Middle clutch and engine PWB YC3 Defective clutch Replace the middle clutch Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 27 13 MP solenoid does not operate Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable MP solenoid and engine PWB YC4 Defective solenoid Replace the MP solenoid Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 27 14 The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present on the cas sette Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Cassette PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC21 Deformed actuator of the paper sensor Check visually and replace if necessary Defective paper sen sor Replace the casse
31. 5 N Figure 1 2 9 1 2 6 2PV 2PW i uc gt a Wyre lt e Figure 1 2 10 KYA Ne AMI 2 1 2 11 1 2 7 e gt g gt _ ote wm c o EE e c OEE 2 0 ON o q y ym 2PV 2PW Installing the toner containers 1 Slide the release lever backward ff 8 N Release lever NS Figure 1 2 12 2 Facing the toner feed slot up and shake the toner container 5 to 6 times m m m E gt Toner feed slot Toner container Figure 1 2 13 1 2 8 2PV 2PW 3 Install toner containers K M C Y Toner 4 Close the inner tray Toner container K container M Toner container C Inner tray Figure 1 2 14 Installing the waste toner box 1 Open the waste toner cover 2 Open the cap of the waste toner box 3 Install the waste toner box 4 Close the waste toner cover Waste toner cover Waste toner box Figure 1 2 15 1 2 9 2PV 2PW Loading paper 1 Pull the cassette out Paper width guide 2 While pressing the width lever adjust the paper width guides to fit the paper size
32. 5 eB all vy apa 20222 20 28 218 211 Drum unit M rao alSlalala aaa nln oo a 2 S Sx ESTO ral ra irs QS 88 1 lt lt 2 15 2150 lt 13215 on On 23 O 2 2 aAao TONS EE o cr oi YC4 H 1 YC37 Drum unit 1 YC5 ID FF Me NE eae ot AG Fee set gee 3 1 LINSENM 1 1 1 gt ERASECDR Drum unit Y 3 LINSENK 3 8 8 4 LERASEMDR Ug ge he go gn OR re cha ean oe A aE 5 DLPTHERM 5 2 ERASEKDR DRRPWB 7 8 3V2 EECLK pas art 1 9 9 YCe 1 10 EBEN 10 1 1 GND 2 1 11 ESSENT 11 TNSENK 2 2 TNSEN TNSEN ERASEYDR DLPPWB K GND TS K 12 TNSENC 3 3 2 3 3 3 3V2 3 DLPTHERM 3 13 13 DLPTHERM 4 4 DLPTHERM 4 BEETBERM 4 i i L 1 1 1 1 1 1 I N N amp 0 NOT NOT N nne N N lt rz za m 0957 oz z o z oz EE 2 gt Xx ax rz a ala 0 O9 ola aQ 9o a alo ul amp olo eoo o 9 N a2 gt gt a lala 15 5 lt 5 5 Oloo OF Elo 9 9 S da 556 B 5 3 Q lt e o
33. Abnormally high fuser thermistor temperature The fuser thermistor detects a temperature higher than 240 C 464 F By the activation of the high temperature error detection circuit 230 C 446 F or more of fuser thermistor the illumi nation of fuser heater was forcibly turned off and 10 s has elapsed Deformed connec tor pin See page 1 4 22 Defective triac See page 1 4 22 Shorted fuser thermistor Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 26 Defective engine PWB 1 4 21 Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Contents Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures Broken fuser thermistor wire Input from fuser thermistor is 3 or less A D value continu ously for 1 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Fuser unit and eject PWB YC3 Eject PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC19 Deformed connec tor pin See page 1 4 22 Defective triac See page 1 4 22 Broken fuser thermistor wire Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 26 Fuser thermostat triggered Reinsert the fuser unit see page 1 5 26 Broken fuser heater wire Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 26 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation se
34. Error codes not described here could fall within software errors If such an error is encountered turn power off then on and advise the service representative 1 Scan to SMB error codes Contents Check procedures corrective measures 1101 Host destined does not exist on the net work 1 2 3 Confirm the destined host Confirm thedevice s network parameters Confirm the parameters of the network to which the device is connected are correct 1102 Login to the host has failed Confirm user name and password Confirm the parameters of the network to which the device is connected are correct Check the host if the folder is properly shared 1103 Destined host folder and or file names are invalid Check illegal characters are not contained within these names Check the name of the folder and files conform with the naming syntax Confirm destined host and folder 1105 SMB protocol is not enabled Confirm device s SMB protocols 2101 Login to the host has failed N gt gt A Confirm the destined host Confirm that the LAN cable is properly connected to the device Check the SMB port number Confirm the device s network parameters Confirm the parameters of the network to which the device is connected are correct 2201 Writing scanned data has failed Check the file name to save the scanned data Confirm the device
35. KYOCERA ECOSYS M6026cdn ECOSYS M6526cdn SERVICE MAN ublished March 201 2PWSM063 CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream Check with your local solid waste officials for details in your area for proper disposal ATTENTION IL Y AUN RISQUE D EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE INCORRECT METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES Il peut tre ill gal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d gout municipales V rifiez avec les fonctionnaires municipaux de votre r gion pour les d tails concernant des d chets solides et une mise au rebut appropri e Revision history Revision Date Pages Revised contents 1 12 November 2013 1 3 43 1 3 89 Correction FAX country code 1 5 29 15 30 The screw number of Procedure 2 or 3 was changed into 4 from 3 26 December 2013 Contents Added 1 5 10 3 and page numbers of contents 1 3 2 1 3 32 1 3 38 to 40 Added U252 U402 U403 U404 1 3 41 Added Method 1 Press the start key 1 3 42 to 47 Added U411 U425 1 3 96 Delete Method 7 Press the start key 1 5 52 to 77 Added Detaching and refitting the image scanner unit 2 3 14 Delete YC15 Addredss Correction
36. Subscriber telephone line Transmission time 3 s or less 33600 bps JBIG ITU T A4 1 chart Transmission speed 33600 31200 28800 26400 24000 21600 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps Coding scheme JBIG MMR MR MH Error correction ECM Original size Max width 8 1 2 216 mm Max length 14 356 mm Automatic document feed Max 50 sheets Scanner resolution Horizontal x Vertical 200 x 100 dpi Normal 8 dot mm x 3 85 line mm 200 x 200 dpi Fine 8 dot mm x 7 7 line mm 200 x 400 dpi Super fine 8 dot mm x 15 4 line mm 400 x 400 dpi Ultra fine 16 dot mm x 15 4 line mm Printing resolution 600 x 600 dpi Gradations 256 shades Error diffusion One Touch key 22 keys Multi Station transmission Max 100 destinations Substitute memory reception 256 sheets or more when using ITU T A4 1 chart Image memory capacity 3 5 MB standard for incoming faxed originals Report output Sent result report FAX RX result report Report for job canceled before sending Activity report Status page NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice 2PV 2PW 1 1 2 Parts names 1 Machine front side Figure 1 1 1 1 Document processor DP 10 USB memory slot 2 Contact glass 11 Main power switch 3 Original size Indicator plate 12 Toner container K 4 Operation panel 13 Toner container
37. YC7 Drum relay PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC34 Defective toner sensor M Replace the developing unit M see page 1 5 19 Defective engine PWB 1 4 24 Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 2PV 2PW Check procedures Code Contents Causes corrective measures 7404 Developing unit Y non Defective connec Reinsert the connector Also check for conti installing error tor cable or poor nuity within the connector cable If none No density detection signal is contact in the con replace the cable output from toner sensor Y in nector Developing unit Y and Drum relay PWB developing unit Y YC13 Drum relay PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC34 Defective toner Replace the developing unit Y see page 1 sensor Y 5 19 Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation see page 1 5 27 7411 Drum unit K non installing Installation of Install drum unit K compatible with the spec error incompatible drum ifications to the machine The EEPROM of drum PWB unit does Hou communica enor Defective connec Reinsert the connector Also check for conti mally tor cable or poor nuity within the connector cable If none contact in the con replace the cable nector Drum unit K and Drum relay PWB YC2 Drum relay PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC34 Defective drum Replace the drum unit K see page 1 5 21 PWB K
38. at 100 ms intervals Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Toner motor M and engine PWB YC24 Defective drive transmission sys tem of the toner motor M Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective toner motor M Replace the toner motor M Defective engine PWB 1 4 23 Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 2PV 2PW Check procedures Code Contents Causes corrective measures 7004 Toner motor Y error Defective connec Reinsert the connector Also check for conti When the toner motor Y is tor cable or poor nuity within the connector cable If none driven the motor over current contact in the con replace the cable detection signal is detected nector Toner motor Y and engine PWB YC26 continuously for 50 times 5 s Defective drive Check if the rollers and gears rotate qt SOO Ier ales transmission sys smoothly If not grease the bushes tem of the toner gears Check for broken gears and replace if motor Y any Defective toner Replace the toner motor Y motor Y Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation see page 1 5 27 7401 Developing u
39. 1 1 Y SCAN ZOOM Scanner magnification in the main scanning direction 2 X SCAN ZOOM Scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction 2 1 1 Adjustable range 32 to 127 in 0 1 increment 0 default 2 2 Adjustable range 25 to 25 in 0 1 increment 0 default Example Y SCAN ZOOM set to 55 X SCAN ZOOM set to 10 IR KCFG SCAN 8 1 55 KCFG SCAN 8 2 10 EXIT Magnified in the main scanning direction Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Magnified in the auxiliary scanning direction Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 2 4 10 2PV 2PW Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration alternative command for the maintenance U066 Description Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration of the original scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original Format 5 1 2 Parameter 1 1 Scanner leading edge registration 2 Scanner leading edge registration of rotated scan 2 Adjustable range 45 to 45 in 0 086mm increment 0 default Example Scanner leading edge registration set to 10 to increase 0 86mm IR KCFG 5 5 1 710 EXIT Scanner leading edge registration within 2 5 mm Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 2 4 11 2PV 2PW
40. Adjusting the scanner center line alternative command for the maintenance mode U067 Description Adjusts the scanner center line of the original scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original Format IR 5 6 1 2 Parameter 1 1 Scanner center line 2 Scanner center line of rotated scan 2 1 1 Adjustable range 70 to 70 in 0 086mm increment 0 default 31172 Adjustable range 40 to 40 0 086mm increment 0 default Example Scanner leading edge registration set to 20 to increase 1 72mm IR KCFG SCAN 6 1 20 EXIT Scanner center line within x 2 0 mm Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 2 4 12 2PV 2PW Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP alternative command for the maintenance mode U068 Description Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP Performs the test copy at the four scanning positions after adjusting Purpose Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used Exe cute KCFG 55 4 107 1 1 command to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning posi tion is changed Format IR KCFG SCAN 9 1 2 Parameter 1 1 DP READ Starting position adjustment for scanning originals 2 BLACK LINE Scanning position for t
41. Causes check procedures 2PV 2PW Corrective measures 7 No primary original feed Check if the surfaces of the following pul leys are dirty with paper powder DP forwarding pulley DP feed pulley Clean with isopropyl alcohol Check if the following pulleys is deformed DP forwarding pulley DP feed pulley Check visually and replace any deformed see page 1 5 82 8 Multiple sheets of orig inal are fed Original is not correctly set Set the original correctly Check if the DP separation pad is worn Replace the DP separation pad if it is worn see page 1 5 86 9 Originals jam Originals outside the specifications are used Use only originals conforming to the specifications Check if the surfaces of the following pul leys are dirty with paper powder DP forwarding pulley DP feed pulley Clean with isopropyl alcohol Check if the contact between the convey ing roller and conveying pulley is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary Check if the contact between the eject roller and eject pulley is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary Check if the contact between the switch back roller and switchback pulley is cor rect 1 4 41 Check visually and remedy if necessary 1 4 6 Send error code 2PV 2PW 3 This section describes the scanning errors and descriptions preventive actions as well as corrective actions
42. DV 560 US M DV 560 US C DV 560 US Y DK 590 TR 590 FK 590 U PARTS HOLDER RETARD ASSY SP PARTS HOLDER FEED ASSY SP ROLLER M P ASSY MK 590 Maintenance kit 200 000 pages Developing unit K Developing unit M Developing unit C Developing unit Y Drum unit Intermediate transfer unit Fuser unit Retard roller unit Paper feed roller unit MP paper feed roller MK 590 MAINTENANCE KIT DV 560 K DV 560 M DV 560 C DV 560 Y DK 590 TR 590 FK 590 E PARTS HOLDER RETARD ASSY SP PARTS HOLDER FEED ASSY SP ROLLER M P ASSY 2 4 1 1702KV8NLO 2PV 2PW 3 2 Repetitive defects gauge E First occurrence of defect 31 1 4 Rear registration roller 38 mm 1 1 2 Charger roller P 50 mm 1 15 16 Front registration roller 50 mm 1 15 16 Sleeve roller 59 mm 2 5 16 Transfer roller 79 3 118 Press roller 82 3 1 4 Heat roller 94 3 11 16 mm Drum The repetitive marks interval may vary depending on operating conditions 2 4 2 3 Firmware environment commands 2PV 2PW The printer maintains a number of printing parameters in its memory There parameters may be changed per manently with the FRPO Firmware RePrOgram commands This section provides information on how to use the FRPO command and its parameters using examples Using FRPO commands for reprogramming firmware The current settings of the FRPO parameter
43. Description Setting range Initial setting One shot detection time for remote switching 0 to 255 7 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting the continuous detection time for remote switching 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys Description Setting range Initial setting Continuous detection time for remote switching 0 to 255 80 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 63 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U641 Setting communication time 2 Description Sets the time out time for fax transmission Purpose To improve transmission performance for international communications mainly Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set using the cursor up down keys Display Description TO Time Out Sets the TO time out time T1 Time Out Sets the T1 time out time T2 Time Out Sets the T2 time out time Ta Time Out Sets the Ta time out time Tb1 Time Out Sets the Tb1 time out time Tb2 Time Out Sets the Tb2 time out time Tc Time Out Sets the Tc time out time Td Time Out Sets the Td time out time Setting the TO time out time Sets the time before detecting a CED or DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent Depending on the quality of the exchange or when the auto select function is selected at the destination unit
44. Detaching and refitting the power source PWB Procedure 1 Remove the right rear cover right cover and right lower cover see page 1 5 6 2 Remove four screws and then remove the power source shield Screws A and B are unidentical there fore do not mix up 3 Remove all connectors from power source PWB 4 Remove two screws 5 Release three hooks and then remove the power source PWB 6 Check or replace the power source PWB and refit all the removed parts Power source shield Power source PWB 9 Figure 1 5 42 Screw 1 5 29 3 Detaching and refitting the main PWB Procedure 1 Remove the FAX control PWB if installed see page 1 5 36 2 Remove the right rear cover right cover and right lower cover see page 1 5 6 3 Remove four screws and then remove the power source shield Screws A and B are unidentical there fore do not mix up 4 Open the fan bracket 5 Slide the fan plate Release four hooks and then remove the fan plate 1 5 30 Hook p t 2PV 2PW 1 Power source shield Screw A Figure 1 5 43 Sa Hook EDT xU CN Hook Figure 1 5 44 6 Remove
45. Figure 1 5 76 Figure 1 5 77 1 5 50 2PV 2PW Scanner unit 5 i c c o o gt E na 1 5 78 1 5 51 2PV 2PW 2 3 Detaching and refitting the image scanner unit Procedure Detach the covers 1 Open the paper conveying unit 2 Release the hook and then remove the IF cover IF cover Paper conveying unit 3 Remove two screws and then remove the rear uppercover Rear upper cover as gt Figure 1 5 80 1 5 52 2PV 2PW 2 1 L X NJ e S Figure 1 5 81 y 0 2 Y Wie LEI ne 7 Z x GAK Left upper cover Inner tray lever er cover Right upp y SS Left upper Inner tra upper cover backward and then remove it inner tray 5 Release two hooks Slide the right o 5 0 gt 5 a lt 0 5 E 9 os o oO oZ o 4 Pull the inner tray lever and open the Figure 1 5 82 1 5 53 2PV 2PW 2 7 Release five hooks hook A B and Front cover then remove the front cover 8 Slide the power source cover backward and then remove it Power source cover a Figure 1 5 84 1 5 54 2PV 2PW 2 Right rear
46. Fold the FFC wire of the new ISU with the alignment to the right 1 Fold the FFC wire in 90 degrees at 300mm from Alignment G at the edge of the holder passing the FFC wire to make Alignment H Or fold it in 90 degrees on the line con necting the Alignment H and Alignment H at 33mm from H 2 Fold it in 90 degrees at Alignment I at 135mm from the Alignment H to make Alignment J 3 Fold the FFC wire in 180 degrees at the Alignment J The reference length from the Alignment J to the wire s edge is about 195mm 4 Unfold the FFC wire to easily pass the FFC wire through the ferrite core at the next step 58 Pass the ISU s FFC wire through the ferrite core affixed on the scanner frame and then pass its edge through the aperture in the center of the scanner frame 2PV 2PW 2 33mm 1mm 180 degrees About 195mm d Tek Figure 1 5 119 wire Aperture Ferrite core Figure 1 5 120 1 5 74 59 Fit the ISU drive belt to the groove at the ISU bottom side Confirm the teeth of the ISU drive belt face the machine front side before fit ting as above After fitting confirm the ISU drive belt and the ISU are connected by horizon tally shifting the ISU in the red arrow s direction in the figure 60 Pass the shaft removed at Step 54 through the holes K L of the scanner frame s machine left side and the ISU s machine rear side and then fit the groove of the shaft
47. PWBs Machine right 22 Machine inside Machine left Figure 2 2 1 PWBs 1 Main PWB 2 Controls the software such as the print data processing and provides the interface with computers 2 Engine PWB EPWB Controls printer hardware such as high voltage bias output con trol paper conveying system control and fuser temperature con trol etc 3 Power source PWB PSPWB After full wave rectification of AC power source input switching for converting to 24 V DC and 5V DC for output Controls the fuser heater 4 High voltage PWB HVPWB Generates main charging developing bias transfer bias and cleaning bias 5 Operation panel PWB OPPWB Controls the LCD display Consists the LCD LED indicators and key switches 6 Relay PWB Consists of wiring relay circuit between main PWB and engine PWB and power source PWB 7 Drum relay PWB DRRPWB Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and the drum units and developing units 2 2 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2T 28 29 2PV 2PW Eject PWB Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and each electrical component eject section
48. U K Netherlands Sweden France Austria Switzerland Belgium Denmark Finland Portugal Ireland Norway Taiwan 1 3 48 2PV 2PW 3 Item No Description 0601 Initializing permanent data Description Initializes software switches on the FAX control PWB according to the destination and OEM Purpose To initialize the FAX control PWB without changing user registration data Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Country Code and enter a destination code using the numeric keys refer to the des tination code list on following for the destination code OEM code is no operation necessary 3 Select Execute and press the start key Data initialization starts To cancel data initialization press the stop key 4 After data initialization the entered destination OEM codes and ROM version are displayed A ROM version displays three kinds application boot and IPL U603 Setting user data 1 Description Makes user settings to enable the use of the machine as a fax Purpose To be executed as required Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Line Type and press the start key 3 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description DTMF DTMF 10PPS 10 PPS 20PPS 20 PPS Initial setting DTMF 4 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 49 Item No
49. USB_DP I O USB data signal 19 USB_DN UO USB data signal 20 VBUS 3 38V DC 3 3 V DC power to FCPWB YC32 1 FEEDCL O 0 24V DC DPPFCL On Off Connectedto 2 REVSOL 0 224V DC DPSBSOL On Off EA 3 PRESOLN 0 24 V DC DPPRSOL On Press Off 4 RELSOLN 0 22V DC DPPRSOL On Release Off 5 DPDETN 0 3 3V DC DP set signal 6 OPSWN 0 3 3 V DC DPOCS On Off 7 ORGSWN 0 3 3V DC DPOS On Off 8 TIMSWN 0 3 3 V DC DPTS On Off 9 GND 10 3 3 2 33VDC 3 3 V DC power to DPDPWB 11 GND Ground 12 24V2 O 24VDC 24 V DC power to PDPWB 13 MOTB2 0 24 V DC pulse DPPFM drive control signal 14 MOTA2 0 24 V DC pulse DPPFM drive control signal 15 1 0 24 DC pulse DPPFM drive control signal 16 MOTA1 0 24 V DC pulse DPPFM drive control signal 2 3 15 Connector Connected to ISU motor SCMOTB2 SCMOTA1 SCMOTB1 SCMOTA2 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 2PV 2PW 3 Description ISUM drive control signal ISUM drive control signal ISUM drive control signal ISUM drive control signal Connected to power source PWB 24 1 GND GND 5V1 24 V DC 5VDC 24 V DC power from PSPWB Ground Ground 5 V DC power from PSPWB YC38 Connected to laser scanner unit KM o N GND VREFM 3 3V3 PDMN VDOMP VDOMN GND VREFK 3 3V3 PDKN VDOKP VD
50. replace the cable APC PWB K and engine PWB YC31 Defective APC PWB K Replace the laser scanner unit KM see page 1 5 45 Defective PD PWB K Replace the laser scanner unit KM see page 1 5 45 Defective engine PWB 1 4 18 Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 2PV 2PW Check procedures Code Contents Causes corrective measures 4202 Laser output error cyan Defective connec Reinsert the connector Also check for conti The pin photo signal is not tor cable or poor nuity within the connector cable If none output from PD PWB C for contact in the con replace the cable one second while laser is nector APC PWB C and engine PWB YC32 emitted Defective APC Replace the laser scanner unit CY see PWB C page 1 5 45 Defective PD PWB Replace the laser scanner unit CY see C page 1 5 45 Defective engine Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 27 PWB 4203 Laser output error Defective connec Reinsert the connector Also check for conti magenta tor cable or poor nuity within the connector cable If none The pin photo signal is not contact in the con replace the cable output from PD PWB M for nector APC PWB M and engine PWB YC31 ong second while laser is Defective APC Replace the laser scanner unit KM see emitted PWB M page 1 5 45 Defective PD PWB Replace the laser scanner unit KM s
51. 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys Description Setting Initial Change in value range setting per step Tb2 time out time 1 to 255 80 100 ms 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting the Tc time out time In the TAD mode set the time to check if there are any triggers for shifting to fax reception after a connected telephone receives a call Only the telephone function is available if shifting is not made within the set Tc time In the TAD mode change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys Description Setting range Initial setting Tc time out time 1 to 255 60 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting the Td time out time Sets the length of the time required to determine silent status fax one of the triggers for Tc time check In the TAD mode change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call Be sure not to set it too short otherwise the mode may be shifted to fax while the unit is being used as a telephone 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys Description Setting range Initial setting Td time out time 1 to 255 9 120 V 6 220 240 V 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is disp
52. 17 9600 bps 4800bps V27ter V 27ter 4800 bps 2400bps V27ter V 27ter 2400 bps Initial setting 14400bps V17 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting the reception speed Sets the reception speed that the sender is informed of using the DIS or NSF signal When the destination unit has V 34 capability V 34 is selected regardless of the setting 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description 14400bps V 17 V 33 V 29 V 27ter 9600bps V 29 V 27ter 4800bps V 2Tter 2400bps V 27ter fallback only Initial setting 14400bps 2 Press the start key The setting is set 1 3 57 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U630 Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender Sets the period before a DCS signal is sent after a DIS signal is received Used when problems occur due to echoes at the sender 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description 500 Sends a DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS 300 Sends a DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS Initial setting 300 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiver Sets the period before an NSF CSI or DIS signal is sent after a CED signal is received Used when problems occur due to echoes at the receiver 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Descripti
53. 2 0 mm DP trailing edge margin 4 0 mm or less Figure 1 3 14 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the margins perform the following maintenance modes U402 P 1 3 38 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 40 2PV 2PW 2 Item No Description U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically Description Carries out processing for the data acquisition that is required in order to perform either auto matic adjustment of the halftone or the ID correction operation Purpose Performed when the quality of reproduced halftones has dropped Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Normal Mode 3 Press the start key A test patterns 1 and 2 are outputted 4 Place the output test pattern 1 as the original Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 1 and set them Press the start key Adjustment is made first time Place the output test pattern 2 as the original Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 2 and set them Press the start key Adjustment is made second time When normally completed Finish is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment error code is displayed Error codes Codes Description Description 001 Patch not detected Engine status error 002 Original deviation in the main Engine s
54. 22 Plastic bag 250 x 600 5 Plastic bag 650 x 650 14 Plastic bag 240 x 350 23 Operation labels 6 Left spacer 15 Installation guide etc 24 Operation label pad 7 Bottom pads A 16 CD ROM 25 Modular cable 8 Bottom pads B 17 Middle spacer 26 Plastic bag 9 Bottom case 18 Power cord 27 Hinge joints 4 in 1 model with FAX only Place the machine on a level surface 1 2 3 2PV 2PW Removing the tapes and pads 1 Open the DP 2 gt E c N o t o 2 c e Figure 1 2 4 c gt E Figure 4 2 5 1 24 2PV 2PW 5 Remove tape A and pad 6 Move the lock lever to the position of release gt 9 c o D c 3 3 c 5 A Q E gt gt lt D gt Us o c 2 e 5 cO Loc BOE DEO N Wy VAN Figure 1 2 6 N a SN 9 Remove two tapes Figure 1 2 7 1 2 5 2PV 2PW o 2 Q oO 10 Open the DP top cover 11 Remove two tapes 12 Close the DP top cover Figure 1 2 8 5 Xx o o gt E ex NAW 2 Lf N
55. 28 2PV 2PW DPDPWB YC6 2 YC2 9 YC3 1 YC3 2 YC3 3 YC3 4 YC1 1 YC1 2 YC1 3 YC1 4 YC8 10 YC8 3 2PV 2PW 3 Original switchback eject sections The original switchback eject sections consists of the parts shown in figure An original of which scanning is complete is ejected to the original eject table by the eject roller In the case of duplex switchback scanning an original is conveyed temporarily to the switchback tray and conveyed again to the original conveying section by the switchback roller 4 yw ua Figure 2 1 30 Original switchback eject sections 1 Conveying roller B 6 Switchback guide 2 Conveying pulley 7 Switchback roller 3 Eject roller 8 Switchback pulley 4 Eject pulley 9 Switchback pulley mount 5 Original eject table 10 Switchback tray 2 1 29 2PV 2PW DPDPWB MTM oe 4 EO YC4 2 Wl EM T YC4 3 E 77 REVSOL o TIMSWN 1 c5 4 Duci 2 2353 YC3 4 YC32 16 YC1 1 YC32 15 OTB1 vCc4 2 YC32 14 MOTA2 vc4 3 YC32 13 MOTB2 vc4 4 MPWB YC32 2 REVSOL vc 9 YC32 3 PRESOLN 8 8 YC32 4 RELSOLN ycg 7 YC32 8 TIMSWN vcg 5 Figure 2 1 31 Original switchback eject sections block diagram 2 1 30 2PV 2PW 2 2 1 Electrical parts layout 1
56. 2PV 2PW Description U604 Setting user data 2 Description Makes user settings to enable the use of the machine as a fax Purpose Use this if the user wishes to adjust the number of rings that occur before the unit switches into fax receiving mode when fax telephone auto select is enabled Method 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys Description Setting range Initial setting Number of fax telephone rings to 15 2 120 V 1 220 240 V If you set this to 0 the unit will start fax reception without any ringing 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Clearing data Description Initializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history Purpose To clear the transmission history Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Comm REC 3 Press the start key Initialization processing starts When processing is finished Completed is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 50 2PV 2PW Item No Description U610 Setting system 1 Description Makes settings for fax reception regarding the sizes of the fax paper and received images and automatic printing of the protocol list Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the i
57. 3 Detaching and refitting the left rear cover left cover and left lower cover Procedure 1 Remove the rear upper cover right upper cover left upper cover and front cover see page 1 5 3 2 Release the hook Slide the left rear cover upward and then remove it 3 Release four hooks hook A B and then remove the left cover Left cover Figure 1 5 15 1 5 9 2PV 2PW 45 co N 2 5 Release three hooks hook A gt B C 4 Remove the screw e and then remove the left lower cover Left lower cover Left lower cover Figure 1 5 16 1 5 10 2PV 2PW 4 Detaching and refitting the inner cover Procedure 1 Remove the cassette Cassette Figure 1 5 17 2 Remove the MP tray cover see page 1 5 17 3 Remove the MP tray Figure 1 5 18 1 5 11 Remove the rear upper cover right upper cover left upper cover and front cover see page 1 5 3 Remove the right rear cover and right cover see page 1 5 6 Remove the left rear cover and left cover see page 1 5 9 Release three hooks and then remove the switch holder Release four hooks and then remove the inner cover 2PV 2PW Inner cover Inner cover Figure 1 5 19 1 5 12 2PV 2PW 1 5 3 Paper feed section 1 Detaching and refitting the retard roller unit Procedure 1 Open the paper conveyi
58. 4 XN 22 Figure 1 5 99 1 5 62 2PV 2PW 2 R Controller shild f 33 Remove five screws and the controller shield Figure 1 5 100 Fan bracket 34 Disconnect the connector YC41 of the controller fan motor 35 Open the fan bracket and remove it Figure 1 5 101 1 5 63 2PV 2PW 2 36 Disconnect the connectors YC15 YC37 YC40 YC38 YC39 YC42 from the main PWB 37 Loosen four screws fixing the machine rear side of the main PWB Be sure to retighten the screws after reat taching the wire holder Main PWB Screws Figure 1 5 102 38 Remove the wires from the wire holder 39 Remove two screws 40 Release three hooks and then remove the wire holder Figure 1 5 103 1 5 64 2PV 2PW 2 FFC wire 41 Disconnect the FFC wire at the connec tor YC8 on the main PWB Reconnect the connectors on the main PWB before reattaching the wire holder detached at Step 40 Figure 1 5 104 42 Remove the wire holder and the ferrite core Ferrite core Wire holder FFC wire Figure 1 5 105 43 Reattach the left and right holders in a reverse manner of removal at Step 20 21 Close the Document Processor and the scanner u
59. 6 1 9 2 SGIVICe mode etie te Mae e NB 1 3 81 1 Executing a service mode 2 2 1 2 2 1 00 2 eene detiene entente ede needed tent 1 3 81 2 Description of service 1 3 82 Troubleshooting 1 4 1 Paper misfeed 1 4 1 1 Paper misfeed indication 022 2 22000190 2 21 0044 0414 14041 entente ndn net 1 4 1 2 Paper misfeed detection 1 4 2 1 4 2 Self diagnostic function eene nennen enne enne nennen 1 4 6 1 Self diagnostic function 2 2222 1 20 1 111 16 AA E AAA 1 4 6 2 Self diagnostic ee dee Roo deed Eod 1 4 7 1 4 3 Image formation problems sssssssseseeeenenen ennemi 1 4 28 1 No image appears entirely 1 4 29 2 No image appears entirely mnn 1 4 29 3 A specific color is printed 1 4 30 4 The back side gets er T eth od repe gt 1 4 30 5 Image iS too light t URP e ERROR 1 4 30 6 The background is colored 1 4 4411 2441 4 41 80 EEN AERE 1 4 31 7 White streaks are printed 1 4 31 8 Black streaks are
60. Black band detection error scanner auxiliary scanning direction leading edge skew 02 Black band detection error scanner main scanning direction far end skew 03 Black band detection error scanner main scanning direction near end skew 03 Black band detection error scanner auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge skew 04 Black band is not detected scanner auxiliary scanning direction leading edge Black band is not detected scanner main scanning direction far end 1 3 43 2PV 2PW 2 Item No Description Error Codes Codes Description 06 Black band is not detected scanner main scanning direction near end 07 Black band is not detected scanner auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge 08 Black band is not detected DP main scanning direction far end 09 Black band is not detected 0a Black band is not detected DP main scanning direction near end DP auxiliary scanning direction leading edge Ob Black band is not detected DP auxiliary scanning direction leading edge original check Oc Black band is not detected DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge Od White band is not detected DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge Oe DMA time out Of Auxiliary scanning direction magnification error 10 Auxiliary scanning direction leading edge error 11 Auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge error 12 DP uxiliary scanning direction skew error 13 Maintena
61. C and Drum relay PWB YC4 Drum relay PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC34 Defective cleaning lamp C Replace the drum unit C see page 1 5 21 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Broken cleaning lamp M wire When the cleaning lamp M is driven the lamp over current detection signal is detected continuously for 10 times 1 s at 100 ms intervals Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Drum unit M and Drum relay PWB YC3 Drum relay PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC34 Defective cleaning lamp M Replace the drum unit M see page 1 5 21 Defective engine PWB 1 4 20 Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Contents Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures Broken cleaning lamp Y wire When the cleaning lamp Y is driven the lamp over current detection signal is detected continuously for 10 times 1 s at 100 ms intervals Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Drum unit Y and Drum relay PWB YC5 Drum relay PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC34 Defective cleaning lamp Y Replace the drum
62. DATA o USB data signal 4 GND Ground 5 GND YC109 1 VDD5 O 33VDC 3 3 V DC power Connectedto 2 GND Ground e KUIO slot 3 RESETN 0 3 3VDC Reset signal 4 VDD5_CUT O 3 3VDC 3 3 V DC power 5 GND Ground 6 WAKEUP 0 3 3 V DC Control signal 7 AUDIO Analog Audio signal 8 RESERVE 9 RESERVE 10 RESERVE 11 GND Ground 12 RESERVE 13 RESERVE 14 GND Ground 15 RESERVE 16 RESERVE 17 GND Ground 18 USB_DP I O USB data signal 19 USB_DN I O USB data signal 20 VBUS 33V DC 3 3 V DC power YC119 A 1 VBUS 5VDC 5 V DC power output Connected to 2 DATA USB data signal USB DATA vo l USB data signal A 4 GND Ground B 1 VBUS 5 0 5 power output 2 DATA USB data signal B 3 DATA USB data signal B 4 GND 2 3 18 Connector Signal Voltage 2PV 2PW 3 Description YC2000 Connectedto SD card c A OO N gt CD DAT3 CMD GND VDD CLK GND DATO DAT 1 DAT2 CD COMMON WP 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC Control signal Control signal Ground Control signal Control signal Ground Data bus signal Data bus signal Data bus signal Control signal Control sig
63. Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation see page 1 5 27 7412 Drum unit C non installing Installation of Install drum unit C compatible with the spec error The EEPROM of drum PWB C does not communicate nor mally incompatible drum unit C ifications to the machine Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Drum unit C and Drum relay PWB YC4 Drum relay PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC34 Defective drum PWB C Replace the drum unit C see page 1 5 21 Defective engine PWB 1 4 25 Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 2PV 2PW Check procedures Code Contents Causes corrective measures 7413 Drum unit M non installing Installation of Install drum unit M compatible with the spec error incompatible drum ifications to the machine The EEPROM of drum PWB unit M M does not communicate nor Defective connec Reinsert the connector Also check for conti mally tor cable or poor nuity within the connector cable If none contact in the con replace the cable nector Drum unit M and Drum relay PWB YC3 Drum relay PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC34 Defective drum Replace the drum unit M see page 1 5 21 PWB M Defective engine Replace t
64. ES Figure 1 2 21 1 2 12 O Close the fan bracket Refit the memory cover Print a status page to check the mem 2PV 2PW Insert the expansion memory into the Memory socket memory socket so that the notches on the memory align with the correspond ing protrusions in the slot ory expansion see page 1 3 82 If memory expansion has been properly performed information on the installed memory is printed with the total memory capacity has been increased Standard memory capacity 768 MB SN 9 N Fan bracket Figure 1 2 22 1 2 13 2PV 2PW This page is intentionally left blank 1 2 14 2PV 2PW 1 3 1 Maintenance mode The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine 1 Executing a maintenance item Enter 10871087 using the numeric keys Maintenance mode is entered Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys Press the start key The maintenance item is selected The selected maintenance item is run Press the stop key Repeat the same maintenance item Yes Run another maintenance item Turn the main power switch off and on Maintenance mode is exited and the system is restarted to initialize it and to reflect the
65. Executive Oficio Il Folio 16K Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Postcards Return postcard Youkei 2 Youkei 4 Custom 216x340 mm Zoom level Manual mode 25 to 40096 196 increments Auto mode 40096 200 141 129 115 90 86 78 70 64 50 25 Copy speed Simplex A4 26 sheets min Letter 28 sheets min Legal 23 sheets min A5 B5 A6 28 sheets min Up to 15 images A5IB5 A6 14 sheets min 16 images or subsequent ones First copy B W time When using the DP 11 0 s or less When the DP is not used 10 0 s or less A4 feed from cassette Color When using the DP 13 0 s or less When the DP is not used 12 0 s or less Warm up time 22 C 71 6 F 60 RH Poweron 29sorless Low power mode 11 s or less Sleep mode 17 s or less Paper Cassette 250 sheets 80g m capacity MP tray 50 sheets 80 g m plain paper A4 Letter or less Output tray capacity 150 sheets 80g m Continuous copying 1 to 999 sheets Light source LED Scanning system Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor 2PV 2PW 3 Item Specifications 3 in 1 model without FAX 4 in 1 model with FAX Photoconductor OPC drum diameter 30 mm Image write system Semiconductor laser Charging system Charger roller Developing system Touch down developing system Develo
66. Figure 1 3 10 2 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the first side is adjusted check the second side and if adjustment is required carry out the adjustment Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 26 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U072 Adjust DP Original Center Description Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the DP is used Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Press the system menu key 3 Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy 4 Press the system menu key 5 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Front DP center line first side 39 to 39 0 0 085 mm Display Description Back DP center line second side 39 to 39 12 0 085 mm Rotate DP center line rotate copying 39 to 39 0 0 085 mm 6 Change the setting value using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Increasing the value moves the image rightward and decreasing it moves the image leftward tt Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 11 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the first
67. Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 20 654 0000 Fax 31 20 653 1256 KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B V Beechavenue 25 1119 RA Schiphol Rijk The Netherlands Phone 31 20 5877200 Fax 31 20 5877260 KYOCERA Document Solutions U K Limited Eldon Court 75 77 London Road Reading Berkshire RG1 5BS United Kingdom Phone 44 118 931 1500 Fax 44 118 931 1108 KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S p A Via Verdi 89 91 20063 Cernusco s N MI Italy Phone 39 02 921791 Fax 39 02 92179 600 KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N V Sint Martinusweg 199 201 1930 Zaventem Belgium Phone 32 2 7209270 Fax 32 2 7208748 KYOCERA Document Solutions France S A S Espace Technologique de St Aubin Route de l Orme 91195 Gif sur Yvette CEDEX France Phone 33 1 69852600 Fax 33 1 69853409 KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana S A Edificio Kyocera Avda de Manacor No 2 28290 Las Matas Madrid Spain Phone 34 91 6318392 Fax 34 91 6318219 KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy Atomitie 5C 00370 Helsinki Finland Phone 358 9 47805200 Fax 358 9 47805390 KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B V Amsterdam NL Z rich Branch Hohlstrasse 614 8048 Z rich Switzerland Phone 41 44 9084949 Fax 41 44 9084950 2014 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc KYOCERG is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation KYOCERA Document Solutions Deutschland GmbH Otto Hahn Strasse 12 40670 M
68. Hooks B Hooks B 0 1 11 x m Figure 1 5 95 E 1 5 60 2PV 2PW 2 Disconnect the connectors on the main PWB Machine with FAX For the machine with FAX MULA Uu 26 Remove two screws and then remove 4 the FAX control PWB FAX control PWB 7 N M For the machine with the hard disk or the net Machine with the hard disk or work interface card the network interface card 27 Remove two pins and then pull out the Jo WSN hard disk or the network interface card nm kard 28 Remove four screws and then remove the power source shield Screws and B are unidentical Thus do not mix up Figure 1 5 97 1 5 61 2PV 2PW 2 29 Pick up the hook A and then open the Hook ie S Hook mem fan bracket i d 30 Release the hook B and slide the fan ED B plate to release the remaining three lt p Oe hooks and then remove it 00 MY XD pos gu Fan bracket Fan slates yu 5 RO EU Figure 1 5 98 31 Remove the screw remove the fuser wire cover 32 Remove the cap SS a 5 gt i Fuser wire cover
69. If none replace the cable DP paper feed clutch and DP drive PWB YC6 DP drive PWB YC8 and main PWB YC32 Defective clutch Replace the DP paper feed clutch Defective PWB Replace the DP drive PWB or main PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 87 1 5 30 21 DP pressure sole noid does not oper ate Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DP pressure solenoid and DP drive PWB YC4 DP drive PWB YC8 and main PWB YC32 2 Defective solenoid Replace the DP pressure solenoid Defective PWB Replace the DP drive PWB or main PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 87 1 5 30 1 4 38 2PV 2PW Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 22 1 Defective connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the DP switchback cable or poor con connector cable If none replace the cable solenoid does not operate tact in the connector DP switchback solenoid and DP drive PWB YC5 DP drive PWB YC8 and main PWB YC32 Defective solenoid Replace the DP switchback solenoid Defective PWB Replace the DP drive PWB or main PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 87 1 5 30 23 An original jams when the main power switch is A piece of
70. ON time detection 144 76543210 Ringer OFF time detection 145 76543210 Ringer OFF non detection time 147 76543210 Dial tone detection time continuous tone 148 76543210 Allowable dial tone interruption time 149 76543210 Time for transmitting selection signal after closing the DC circuit 151 76543210 Ringer frequency detection invalid time 1 3 74 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U910 Clearing the print coverage data Description Clears the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper and its period of time as shown on the service status report Purpose To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Execute using the cursor up down keys 3 Press the start key The print coverage data is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 75 2PV 2PW Item No Description U917 Setting backup data reading writing Description Retrieves the backup data to a USB memory from the machine or writes the data from the USB memory to the machine Purpose To store and write data when replacing the HDD Method 1 2 3 Press the power key on the operation panel and after verifying the power indicator has gone off switch off the main power switch Insert USB memo
71. Paper 3 While pressing the length lever adjust length guide the paper length guide to fit the paper size Paper width guide 4 Load the paper in the cassette 5 Turn the paper size dial so that it shows the paper size you are going to use 6 Insert the cassette Figure 1 2 17 1 2 10 Connecting the interface cable 1 Connect the interface cable to the machine and PC or network Connecting the power cord Remove the power cord cover 2 Connect the power cord to the machine and the wall outlet 3 Refit the power cord cover 4 Press the main power switch to turn power on 5 Installing the printer driver refer to operation guide SS Completion of the machine installation 2PV 2PW MS USB interface Network interface Figure 1 2 18 WN Power source cord Figure 1 2 19 IM th Power cord cover 1 2 11 2PV 2PW 1 2 3 Installing the expansion memory option Procedure 1 Turn off the main power switch Caution Do not insert or remove expansion memory while machine power is on Doing so may cause damage to the machine and the expansion memory 2 Remove the memory cover Figure 1 2 20 3 Release the hook and then open the 2 US fan bracket 3 uS lt lt
72. Replace the top heater unit Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Defective PF heater PWB or PF main PWB 1 4 12 Replace the PF heater PWB or PF main PWB Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Contents Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures PF heater 2 low temperature error paper feeder 2 An external temperature higher than 5 C 9 F is not detected when one minute elapses after PF heater 2 is turned on Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF heater 2 and PF heater PWB YC2 PF heater PWB YC3 and PF main PWB YC113 PF thermistor 2 and PF main PWB YC115 PF thermistor 2 installed incor rectly Check the installation of the PF thermistor 2 Defective PF thermistor 2 Replace the side heater unit Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Broken PF heater 2 Replace the side heater unit Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Defective PF heater PWB or PF main PWB Replace the PF heater PWB or PF main PWB Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Paper feeder communica tion error Communication error between engine PWB and optional paper feeder Improper installa tion paper feeder Follow installation instruction carefully again
73. Right rear 2 2 IZ A FNN Y d 7 I g A cover backward and then remove it 9 Remove the screw 10 Release four hooks Slide the right rear Figure 1 5 85 c o c o gt gt o E o E o o gt Memory cover Figure 1 5 86 1 5 55 2PV 2PW 2 12 Open the waste toner cover 13 Push the lock release button and then remove the waste toner box Close the cap of the waste toner box Waste toner box Figure 1 5 87 14 Open the MP tray 15 Release four hooks hook A Slide the right cover forward and then remove it 16 Remove the waste toner cover Right cover Figure 1 5 88 1 5 56 17 Release the hook Slide the right lower coverforward and then remove it Fully open the Document Processor and the scanner unit 18 Remove the left and right pins by push ing the pins out from inside while open ing the top tray till the half way of the opening angle After this procedure the top tray goes down and only the scanner unit opens 2PV 2PW 2 Pd Right lower cover Figure 1 5 89 Figure 1 5 90 1 5 57 2PV 2PW 2 19 Release each four hooks and remove the left and right rails Figure 1 5 91 20 Remove two springs from the left and right holders A
74. TCS Detects the presence of the toner container Waste toner cover sensor WTCS Detects the opening and closing of the waste toner cover Fuser thermistor FTH Detects the heat roller temperature Outer temperature sensor OTEMS Detects the outside temperature and humidity Inner temperature sensor ITEMS Detects the inside temperature 2 2 5 3 Motors 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Machine right 22 Machine inside Machine left Figure 2 2 3 Motors Paper feed motor PFM Drives the paper feed section Lift motor Operates the bottom plate Drum motor DRM Drives the drum unit Developing motor DEVM Drives the developing unit Fuser motor Drives the transfer section and the fuser section Duplex motor DUM Drives the duplex section Toner motor K TM K Replenishes toner to the developing unit Toner motor M Replenishes toner to the developing unit M Toner motor C Replenishes toner to the developing unit C Toner motor Y Replenishes toner to the developing unit Y Polygon motor KM PM KM Drives the polygon mirror KM Pol
75. U403 Adjust Scanning Margin Table 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 U404 Adjust Scanning Margin DP 3 0 2 5 3 0 4 0 U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically 0411 Auto Adj Scn U425 Set Target 2 1 3 2 Section Content of maintenance item 2PV 2PW Initial setting Fax Initializing all data Initializing permanent data Setting user data 1 DTMF Setting user data 2 2 120 V 1 220 240 V Clearing data Setting system 1 Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 10096 magnification Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in the auto reduction mode Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax A4R LetterR in the auto reduction mode Setting system 2 Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduc tion Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduc tion when A4 paper is set Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduc tion when letter size paper is set Setting system 3 Selecting if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performed Setting the automatic printing of the protocol list Setting how trailing edge margins are detected On Setting the remote switching mode One Setting the transmission system 1 Setting the auto redialing interval Setting the number of times of auto redialing 3 120 V 2 220 240 V 2 120 V 3 220 240 V Se
76. VDC 2 3 4 IDS2 detection signal IDS2 detection signal Ground IDS2 control signal 3 3 V DC power to IDS2 Connector Connected to relay PWB Signal 24V1 GND GND GND GND 24V3 24V3 24V3 24V3 GND SLEEPN HYPINT I2CINT 3 3V2 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC 2PV 2PW Description 24 V DC power from RYPWB Ground Ground Ground Ground 24 V DC power from RYPWB 24 V DC power from RYPWB 24 V DC power from RYPWB 24 V DC power from RYPWB Ground Sleep mode signal On Off Sleep return signal On Off Not used 3 3 V DC power from RYPWB Connected to relay PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 eo TCOVOPN EGHOLD ZCROSS RELAY HEATRE1 HEATRE2 VSYNC EGIRN SBSY SDIR S SO SCKN N C I2CSCL GND I2CSDA MPFJAM 3 3V1_MFP 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC 2 3 5 TTSW On Off Engine hold signal Zero cross signal Power relay signal FH On Off Not used Vertical synchronizing signal Engine interruption signal Serial busy signal Serial communication direction change signal Serial communication data signal input Serial communication data signal output Serial communication clock signal Not used EEPROM clock signal Groun
77. abu FAX Black amp White o 9 10 21 WES jJ CO 00 Processing Memory 6 5 11 12 15 17 18 19 20 24 25 27 28 32 33 NEM 50 le 2asc Clear Card Copy C Function Menu C C C C Reset 5 6 uno 2 Stop Logout 7 pars 9 wxvz h Q am C de uo qum Start k4 0 FF symbols C5 ese es D Memory Attentioil im LI n p m 20 22 23 26 29 30 31 34 Figure 1 1 4 System menu Counter key 13 Auto color key 25 Function Menu key Document box key 14 Full color key 26 Numeric keys Status Job cancel key 15 Black and White key 27 Clear key Copy key 16 Message display 28 Reset key Send key 17 Left Select key 29 Stop key FAX key 18 Right Select key 30 Start key Address book key 19 Processing indicator 31 Program keys Address recall Pause key 20 Memory indicator 32 Main power LED Confirm Add destination key 21 Attention indicator 33 Energy saver key On Hook key 22 Back key 34 Logout key One touch keys 23 Cursor keys Shift Lock key 24 OK key 4 in 1 model with FAX only 1 1 3 Machine cross section 2PV 2PW
78. all settings except those pertinent to the type of machine namely each counter ser vice call history and mode setting Also initializes backup RAM according to region specification selected in maintenance item U252 Setting the destination Purpose To return the machine settings to their factory default Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Execute 3 Press the start key All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is initialized based on the destination setting Turn the main power switch off and on An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error When errors occurred turn main power switch off then on and execute initialization using maintenance item U021 Error codes Codes Description 0001 Entity error 0002 Controller error 0020 Engine error 0040 Scanner error 1 3 16 2PV 2PW Item No Description U034 Adjust Paper Timing Data Description Adjusts the leading edge registration or center line Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description LSU Out Top Leading edge registration adjustment LSU Out Left Center line adjustment Adjustment LSU Out
79. as the arbitrary combination of 0 to 9 and or 15 certainly included 3 Select the Excute 4 Press the start key ID is set 5 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Setting Initialaize 1 Select the Excute 2 Press the start key ID is intialized 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 14 Item No Description 2PV 2PW U019 Firmware Version Description Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PWB Purpose To check the part number or to decide if the newest version of ROM is installed Method 1 Press the start key The ROM version are displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys Display Description Main MMI Engine Engine Boot Scanner Scanner Boot Option Language Color Table Color Table2 Cass2 Cass3 Fax APL Fax Boot Fax IPL Main ROM Operation ROM Engine ROM Engine booting Scanner ROM Scanner booting Optional language ROM Color table 1 ROM Color table 2 ROM Paper feeder 2 Paper feeder 3 Fax APL Fax Boot Fax IPL Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 15 Item No 2PV 2PW Description 0021 Memory initializing Description Initializes
80. connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Fuser pressure release motor and engine PWB YC38 Defective drive transmission sys tem of the fuser pressure release motor Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective fuser pressure release motor Replace the fuser pressure release motor Defective engine PWB 1 4 14 Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 2PV 2PW Check procedures Code Contents Causes corrective measures 2500 Paper feed motor error Defective connec Reinsert the connector Also check for conti The drum motor ready input is tor cable or poor nuity within the connector cable If none not given for 5 s during the contact in the con replace the cable paper feed motor is ON nector Paper feed motor and engine PWB YC3 Defective drive Check if the rollers and gears rotate transmission sys smoothly If not grease the bushes and tem of the paper gears Check for broken gears and replace if feed motor any Defective paper Replace the paper feed motor feed motor Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation see page 1 5 27 2600 PF paper feed motor error Defec
81. cursor up down keys Enter the prespecified remote diagnostics ID number 0000 to 9999 using the numeric keys Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key 1 3 97 2PV 2PW This page is intentionally left blank 1 3 98 2PV 2PW 1 4 1 Paper misfeed detection 1 Paper misfeed indication When a paper misfeed occurs the machine immediately stops printing and displays the paper misfeed mes sage on the operation panel To remove paper misfed in the machine pull out the cassette open the rear cover or paper conveying unit Paper jammed in cassette 1 JAM Figure 1 4 1 Paper misfeed indication 2 Paper misfeed detection condition Document Processor 2PV 2PW Paper jam location Cassette 1 MP tray Machine inside D Fuser Eject sections Duplex section Cassette 2 8 Cassette 3 Document processor Machine Sensors 1 Registration sensor 2 MP paper conveying sensor Eject sensor 4 PF feed sensor 1 5 PF feed sensor 2 6 DP timing sensor Figure 1 4 2 Paper jam location 1 4 2 Contents Conditions 2PV 2PW Jam location Controller sequence error Secondary paper feed request given by the con troller is unreachable C Registration sensor not detected Activation of the registration sensor on off is undetected for 90 s
82. during printing Controller sequence error Paper feeding request for duplex printing given by the controller is unreachable Inner tray open The inner tray is opened during printing Rear cover open The rear cover is opened during printing Front cover open The waste toner cover is opened during printing Controller sequence error Paper feed request was received from the duplex section despite the absence of paper in the duplex section Controller sequence error The controller issued the duplex section a request for more pages than the duplex print cycle con tains Rear cover open paper feeder 1 The rear cover of paper feeder 1 is opened during printing Rear cover open paper feeder 2 The rear cover of paper feeder 2 is opened during printing No paper feed from cassette 1 The registration sensor RS does not turn on dur ing paper feed from cassette No paper feed from cassette 2 PF feed sensor 1 PFFS1 does not turn on during paper feed from paper feeder 1 No paper feed from cassette 3 PF feed sensor 2 PFFS2 does not turn on during paper feed from paper feeder 2 No paper feed from duplex section The registration sensor RS does not turn on dur ing paper feed from duplex section No paper feed from MP tray MP paper conveying sensor MPPCS does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray Multiple sheets in cassette 1 Th
83. each three screws and then remove laser scanner unit KM CY 12 Check or replace the laser scanner unit and refit all the removed parts Laser scanner unit KM Laser scanner unit CY Figure 1 5 71 1 5 47 2PV 2PW 2 Detaching and refitting the scanner unit Procedure 1 Remove the document processor see page 1 5 78 2 Remove the connector YC36 and two FFCs YC8 YC43 from main PWB 3 Open the scanner unit 4 Remove the motor wire CCD wire and LCD wire from the wire holder Figure 1 5 73 1 5 48 2PV 2PW 5 Release each four hooks and then remove left and right rails Figure 1 5 74 6 Remove two springs from left and right rails SS JN Nu C NS Figure 1 5 75 1 5 49 7 Remove left and right rails from the scanner unit 8 Remove left and right washers and springs and then pull pins out 2PV 2PW Scanner unit Ps BR m Su SS NNE NM Lal
84. exam ples Adjusting the print start timing alternative command for the maintenance mode U034 Description Adjusts the leading edge registration or left edge Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the left edges of the copy image and original Format IR KCFG PFRC 1 2 3 Parameter 1 Paper source number 0 MP tray 2 6 Cassette2 6 100 Duplex e g landscape images short edge bind 200 Rotated duplex e g portrait images long edge bind 2 Edge to adjust 1 Leading edge 2 Left edge 3 Adjustable range 128 to 127 number of dot in 600 Example Set the leading edge of MP tray to 30 dots IR KCFG 0 1 30 Leading edge registration Correct image Output Output example 1 example 2 Left edge of printing Correct image Output Output example 1 example 2 2 4 9 2PV 2PW Adjusting the scanner magnification alternative command for the maintenance mode U065 Description Adjusts the magnification of the original scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is incorrect Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect Format KCFG SCAN 8 1 2 Parameter
85. excess lines is below the setting those lines are ignored If over the setting the entire data on a page is fur ther reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Number of lines to be ignored when 0 to 22 0 16 lines receiving in the auto reduction mode Increase the setting if a page received in the reduction mode is over reduced and too much trailing edge margin is left Decrease it if the received image does not include all transmitted data 2 Press the start key The value is set 1 3 51 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U610 Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax A4R LetterR in the auto reduction mode Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the record ing capacity when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode onto A4R or LetterR paper under the conditions below If the number of excess lines is below the setting those lines are ignored If over the setting the entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Number of lines to be ignored when 0 to 22 0 16 lines receiving a fax A4R lette
86. feeder Defective PF fan motor 2 Replace the side heater unit Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Defective PF main PWB 1 4 10 Replace the PF main PWB Refer to the ser vice manual for the paper feeder Contents Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures PF heater 1 high tempera ture error paper feeder 2 A temperature higher than 75 C 167 F is detected Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF fan motor 1 and PF main PWB YC111 Shorted PF therm istor 1 Replace the top heater unit Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Defective PF fan motor 1 Replace the top heater unit Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Defective PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB Refer to the ser vice manual for the paper feeder PF heater 2 high tempera ture error paper feeder 2 A temperature higher than 75 C 167 F is detected Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF fan motor 2 and PF main PWB YC111 Shorted PF therm istor 2 Replace the side heater unit Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Defective
87. image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed Setting 1 Press the start key Setting Initial Change in Display Description range setting value per step DP Read Starting position adjustment for 33 to 33 0 0 086 mm scanning originals Black Line Scanning position for the test 0 to 3 0 22 mm copy originals Select DP Read Change the setting using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys When the setting value is increased the scanning position moves to the right and it moves to the left when the setting value is decreased Press the start key The value is set Select Black Line Change the setting using the left right keys or numeric keys Press the start key The value is set Set the original the one which density is known in the DP and press the system menu key Press the start key Test copy is executed Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check that no black line appears and the image is normally scanned Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 23 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U070 Adjust DP Motor Speed Description Adjusts the DP original scanning speed Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification i
88. injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol CAUTION Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com pliance with warning messages using this symbol Symbols The triangle A symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution The specific point of attention is shown inside the symbol General warning AN Warning of risk of electric shock A Warning of high temperature G indicates a prohibited action The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol General prohibited action Q Disassembly prohibited indicates that action is required The specific action required is shown inside the symbol General action required Remove the power plug from the wall outlet Always ground the copier 1 Installation Precautions WARNING Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified Avoid multiple connections to one outlet they may cause fire or electric shock When using an extension cable always check that it is adequate for the rated current Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point Not grounding the copier may cause fire or electric shock Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or electric shock Never connect the ground cable to any of the following gas pipe
89. maintenance item No is displayed Memory data Individual setting Description Displays the memory data Purpose This mode need not be executed When the status report is output the setting is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 80 2PV 2PW 1 3 2 Service mode The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine 1 Executing a service mode Press the System Menu Counter key Select Adjust Maint using the cursor up down keys and press the start key tenu appeals Select Service Setting using the cursor up down keys and press the start key The Sys Menu Count menu appears The Service Setting menu appears The selected service mode is run Press the stop key End 1 3 81 2PV 2PW 2 Description of service mode Service items Description Service Status Printing a status page for service purpose Description Prints a status page for service purpose The status page includes various settings and service cumulative Purpose To acquire the current printing environmental parameters and cumulative information Method 1 Enter the Service Setting menu 2 Select Service Status using the cursor up down keys 3 Press the start key 4 Press Yes the Left Select key Two pages will be printed Complet
90. of a mismatch in individual numbers destina tion unit is either of our make or by another manufacturer U03500 In interoffice subaddress based bulletin board reception the specified Subaddress confi dential box number was not registered in the destination unit U03600 An interoffice subaddress based bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified subaddress confidential box number U03700 Interoffice subaddress based bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit had no subaddress based bulletin board transmission capability or data was not stored in any subaddress confidential box in the destination unit U04000 In interoffice subaddress based transmission mode the specified subaddress box num ber was not registered in the destination unit 1 4 48 Error code 2PV 2PW Description U04100 Subaddress based transmission failed because the destination unit had no subaddress based reception capability U04200 In encrypted transmission the specified encryption box was not registered in the desti nation unit U04300 Encrypted transmission failed because the destination unit had no encrypted communi cation capability U04400 Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree U04500 Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys U05100 Password check transm
91. or poor nuity within the connector cable If none After the lift motor is driven contact in the con replace the cable the ON status of lift sensor nector canna DE detected Hr SS Lift motor and engine PWB YC27 The cassette installed confir mation message is displayed Defective drive Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not on the operation panel and transmission sys grease the bushes and gears Check for even if the cassette is opened tem of the lift broken gears and replace if any and closed the cassette motor installed confirmation mes Defective lift motor Replace the lift motor is displ ti 2 SHE Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor y PWB rect operation see page 1 5 27 1020 PF lift motor error Defective bottom Check to see if the bottom plate can move paper feeder 1 When the lift motor is driven the motor over current detec tion signal is detected continu ously for 50 times 5 s at 100 ms intervals After the lift motor is driven the ON status of lift sensor cannot be detected for 8 s The cassette installed confir mation message is displayed on the operation panel and even if the cassette is opened and closed the cassette installed confirmation mes sage is displayed 5 times suc cessively plate elevation mechanism in the cassette smoothly and repair it if any problem is found Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector
92. or replacing the backup RAM output a list of the current settings of the mainte nance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be output using the cursor up down keys Display Output list Maintenance List of the current settings of the maintenance modes User Status Outputs the user status page Svc Status Outputs service status page Event Outputs the event log NW Status Outputs network status page All Outputs the all reports 3 Press the start key A list is output Method Send to the USB memory 1 Press the power key on the operation panel and after verifying the main power indicator has gone off switch off the main power switch Insert USB memory in USB memory slot Turn the main power switch on Enter the maintenance item Press the start key Select the item to be send Select Text or HTML Display Output list Print Outputs the report USB Text Sends output data to the USB memory text type USB HTML Sends output data to the USB memory HTML type 8 Press the start key Output will be sent to the USB memory Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 6 Item No Description 2PV 2PW U000 Event log Event Log MFP 2 2013 07 18 15 15 3 4 5 1 Firmware version 2PW 2000 000 000 2013 07 18 T
93. outside call 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description Flash Flashing mode Loop Code number mode Initial setting Loop 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting the loop current detection before dialing Sets if the loop current detection is performed before dialing 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description On Performs loop current detection before dialing Off Does not perform loop current detection before dialing Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 70 2PV 2PW Item No Description U670 Outputting lists Description Outputs a list of data regarding fax transmissions Printing a list is disabled either when a job is remaining in the buffer or when Pause All Print Jobs is pressed to halt printing Purpose To check conditions of use settings and transmission procedures of the fax Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be output using the cursor up down keys 3 Press the start key The selected list is output Display Description Sys Conf Report Outputs a list of software switches self telephone number confidential boxes ROM versions and other information Action List Outputs a list of error history transmission line details and
94. paper feeder 2 The registration sensor RS does not turn on dur ing paper feed from MP tray Registration sensor stay jam The registration sensor RS does not turn off dur ing paper feed from paper feeder 1 The registration sensor RS does not turn off dur ing paper feed from paper feeder 2 The registration sensor RS does not turn off dur ing paper feed from MP tray Registration sensor remain ing jam The registration sensor RS is turned on when the power is turned on Eject sensor non arrival jam The eject sensor ES does not turn on during paper feed from cassette The eject sensor ES does not turn on during paper feed from paper feeder 1 The eject sensor ES does not turn on during paper feed from paper feeder 2 The eject sensor ES does not turn on during paper feed from duplex section The eject sensor ES does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray Refer to figure 1 4 2 for paper jam location see page 1 4 2 1 4 4 Contents Conditions 2PV 2PW Jam location Eject sensor stay jam The eject sensor ES does not turn off during paper feed from cassette The eject sensor ES does not turn off during paper feed from paper feeder 1 The eject sensor ES does not turn off during paper feed from paper feeder 2 The eject sensor ES does not turn off during paper feed from duplex section The eject
95. printed 1 4 31 9 Streaks are printed 2 1 4 32 10 Spots are printed eei iere et divae enn e dle ea dd 1 4 32 11 The leading edge of image begins to print too early or too 1 4 32 12 Paper is wrinkled csi dre e eode e eee EE een aee d t 1 4 32 13 Offset OCCUIS ete tee be tte 1 4 33 14 Part of image is 1 4 33 15 F sing ls IQOSQ itii Eee 1 4 33 16 Colors are printed offset to each other 1 4 34 124 4 Electric probl ms et te 1 4 35 2PV 2PW 3 1 4 6 S8nd error COG Cat 2 iru edt e olii OR ER ck teed 1 4 42 1 Scanito SMB enor CodeS eiie beet itte 1 4 42 2 SCan to FTP error codes eine eb cO Re a 1 4 43 3 Scan to E mail error codes eene ite eiit anna e 1 4 45 134 7 MOR COGGS Itt tt eoe im eto dine deir ed 1 4 47 1 1 4 47 2 Table of general classification 1 4 48 2 1 0004 error code table Interrupted phase B 1 4 50 2 2 U006XX error code table Problems with the
96. pulley unit Procedure Screw v gt 9 a o 2 E o o 5 gt 2 z 5 O o 9 Oo L ngg EET c 250 NO the DP rear cover Figure 1 5 134 DP front cover 4 Release two hooks and then remove the DP front cover Qe 5 Su 5 Figure 1 5 135 1 5 82 5 Remove the stop ring and bush 6 Remove the stop ring A and then remove the DP paper feed clutch from the PF shaft 7 Remove the stop ring B and then remove the PF collar spring spring col lar pin and bush from the PF shaft 2PV 2PW Stop ring Figure 1 5 136 Spring collar Pin T PF shaft pring Bush 224 a 2 J IA PF collar Bc DP paper feed clutch VAC Figure 1 5 137 1 5 83 8 11 13 Remove the DP forwarding pulley unit Remove the stop ring A Remove the DP feed pulley unit from the LF holder Remove the stop ring B 12 Remove the PF collar spring spring collar and pin from the PF shaft Remove the DP feed pulley one way clutch PF pulley gear and pin from the PF shaft 2PV 2PW DP forwarding pulley unit Figure 1 5 138 Spring Spring collar w DP feed a pulley Pin Stop ring B PF collar One way clutch PF pulley gear lt PF s
97. pulse Horizontal synchronizing signal 6 GND l Ground 7 Not used 8 LONBMN 0 3 3V DC APCPWB M sample hold signal 9 ENBMN 0 3 3V DC APCPWB M laser enable signal 10 PDMN 0 3 3 V DC pulse Horizontal synchronizing signal 11 LSUTHERMM Analog ITEMS detection voltage 12 POLCLK1 0 3 3 V DC pulse PM KM clock signal 13 POLRDYN1 0 3 3 DC PM KM ready signal 14 POLONN1 0 3 3 V DC PM KM On Off 15 GND Ground 16 24V3 O 24V DC 24 V DC power to PM KM 17 Not used 18 N C Not used 2 3 9 Connector Signal 2PV 2PW Description YC32 Connected to laser scanner unit CY oO ON DOO FW gt et dX x a A GND N C LONBCN ENBCN PDCN GND N C LONBYN ENBYN PDYN LSUTHERMY POLCLKO POLRDYNO POLONNO GND 24V3 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 24V DC Ground Not used APCPWB C sample hold signal APCPWB C laser enable signal Horizontal synchronizing signal Ground Not used APCPWB Y sample hold signal APCPWB Y laser enable signal Horizontal synchronizing signal Not used PM CY clock signal PM CY ready signal PM CY On Off Ground 24 V DC power to PM CY Connected to paper feeder GND OPSCLK OPRDYN OPSDI OPSDO 3 3V1 GND OPSELO OPSEL1 OPSEL
98. s network parameters Confirm the parameters of the network to which the device is connected are correct 2203 No response from the host during a cer tain period of time Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected Confirm that the LAN cable is properly connected to the device 1 4 42 2 Scan to FTP error codes Contents 2PV 2PW 3 Check procedures corrective measures 1101 FTP server does not exist on the net work 1 2 3 Check the FTP server name Confirm device s network parameters Confirm the parameters of the network to which the device is connected are correct 1102 Login to the FTP server has failed Confirm user name and password Check the FTP server name 1103 Destined folder is invalid Check that the illegal characters are not contained within these names Check the FTP server name 1105 FTP protocol is not enabled Confirm device s FTP protocols 1131 Initializing TLS has failed Confirm device s security parameters 1132 TLS negotiation has failed Confirm device s security parameters Check the FTP server name 2101 Access to the FTP server has failed MB OA Check the FTP server name Confirm that the LAN cable is properly connected to the device Check the FTP port number Confirm device s network parameters Confirm the netwo
99. switch off on to restart the machine If the error is not resolved replace engine PWB see page 1 5 27 Scanner engine ROM checksum error Defective engine PWB Turn the main power switch off on to restart the machine If the error is not resolved replace engine PWB see page 1 5 27 Power supply in drive sys tem error Main power switch was turned off without using the power key or a power failure has occurred 1 4 27 Turn on power To switch off power first press the power key until the main power indicator goes off then turn the main power switch off 2PV 2PW 1 4 3 Image formation problems If the part causing the problem was not supplied use the unit including the part for replacement 1 No image 2 No image 3 specific color 4 The back side 5 Image is too appears entirely appears entirely is printed solid gets dirty light white black _ S t See page 1 4 29 See page 1 4 29 See page 1 4 30 See page 1 4 30 See page 1 4 30 6 The back 7 White streaks 8 Black streaks 9 Streaks are 10 Spots are ground is col are printed verti are printed verti printed horizon printed ored cally cally tally See page 1 4 31 See page 1 4 31 See page 1 4 31 See page 1 4 32 See page 1 4 32 11 The leading 12 Paper is wrin 13 Offset occurs 14 Partofimageis 15 Fusi
100. the screw and then remove the fuser wire cover 7 Remove five screws and then remove the controller shield 2 A 2PV 2PW x 1 ON lt lt BAL NY eR BNW gt A Screw 2 N ET 2PV 2PW N Fan bracket X gt 2 x NS NS SG MS o N N 2 7 2 E N 7 eae controller fan motor 9 Open the fan bracket and then remove it 8 Remove the connector YC41 of the Figure 1 5 47 from the main PWB YC37 YC41 YC40 YC38 YC39 and 10 Remove seven connectors YC15 YC42 Main PWB Figure 1 5 48 1 5 32 2PV 2PW 11 Remove two screws 12 Release three hooks and then remove the wire holder oun hs Wire holder Screw 13 Remove three connectors YC36 YC32 YC12 and two FFCs YC8 Y C43 from the main PWB KG 14 Main PWB YC36 2 Main PWB Figure 1 5 50 1 5 33 2PV 2PW 14 Remove three screws
101. times in the fax telephone auto select mode Sets the CNG detection times in the fax telephone auto select mode 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description 1Time Detects CNG once 2Time Detects CNG twice Initial setting 2Time 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 60 2PV 2PW Item No Description 0633 Setting communication control 4 Description Makes settings for fax transmission regarding the communication Purpose To reduce transmission errors when a low quality line is used Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set using the cursor up down keys Display Description V 34 Enables or disables V 34 communication V 34 3429Hz Sets the V 34 symbol speed 3429 Hz DIS 2Res Sets the number of times of DIS signal reception RTN Check Sets the reference for RTN signal output Enabling disabling V 34 communication Sets whether V 34 communication is enabled disabled for transmission and reception 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description On V 34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception TX V 34 communication is enabled for transmission only RX V 34 communication is enabled for reception only Off V 34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception
102. voltage Black 18 BYMCNT Developing magnet roller bias control voltage Yellow 19 MCCNT Charger roller control voltage Cyan 20 T2RREM 0 3 3 V DC pulse Secondary transfer bias reverse signal 21 MMCNT PWM Charger roller control voltage Magenta 22 BMSCNT PWM Developing sleeve roller bias control voltage Magenta 23 MISENS Analog Charger roller AC current signal 24 BKACNT PWM Developing AC bias control voltage 2 3 6 Black Connector Signal Voltage 2PV 2PW Description YC11 Connected to high voltage PWB BCACNT BMACNT BYACNT HVCLKK BCSCNT HVCLKM GND GND PWM PWM PWM 0 3 3 V DC pulse PWM 0 3 3 V DC pulse Developing AC bias control voltage Cyan Developing AC bias control voltage Magenta Developing AC bias control voltage Yellow Developing bias clock signal Black Developing sleeve roller bias control voltage Cyan Developing bias clock signal Magenta Ground Ground Connected to drum motor MOTREV GND MOTRDYN SPEEDSEL MOTCLK MOTEN GND 24V3 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 24 V DC Ground DRM ready signal DRM speed selection signal DRM clock signal DRM On Off Ground 24 V DC power to DRM Connected to developing motor 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 24V3 GND DLPMOTREN DLPMOTCLK DLPMOT RDYN MOTREV 24 V DC
103. 13 03 02 10 44 Data and Time 2013 03 02 11 11 2013 03 02 10 57 2013 03 02 10 44 2013 03 02 10 00 6 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Figure 1 3 1 Detail of event log Items Description System version System date Engine soft version Engine boot version 1 3 7 Item No Description 2PV 2PW U000 Description Operation panel mask version Machine serial number Paper Jam Log Count Event Remembers 1 to 16 of occurrence If the occur rence of the previous paper jam is less than 16 all of the paper jams are logged When the occurrence excesseds 16 the oldest occur rence is removed The total page count at the time of the paper jam Log code hexadeci mal 5 categories a Cause of a paper jam b Paper source c Paper size d Paper type e Paper eject a Cause of paper jam Hexadecimal Refer to P 1 4 2 for paper jem location 0100 Controller sequence error 0105 Registration sensor not detected 0106 Controller sequence error 0110 Top tray open 0111 Rear cover open 0112 Front cover open 0120 Controller sequence error 0121 Controller sequence error 0211 Rear cover open paper feeder 1 0212 Rear cover open paper feeder 2 0213 Rear cover open paper feeder 3 0501 No paper feed from cassette 1 0502 No paper feed from cassette 2 0503 No paper feed from cassette 3 0504 No paper feed from casse
104. 2 52 Open the scanner unit and release four hooks and then forward slide the oper ation cover Operation cover Figure 1 5 114 1 5 70 2PV 2PW 2 53 Remove two screws at the machine rear side and release three hooks under the operation cover Remove the ISU cover while pushing the DP lock lever to the right using a flat blade screw driver Do not touch the inner side of the contact glass removed with the ISU cover Dirt adhered triggers the abnormal image DP locl lever SCrews Figure 1 5 115 1 5 71 2PV 2PW 2 Detaching the ISU 54 Lift up the machine right end of the shaft to come off from the locking hole of the scanner frame and then pull out the shaft in the machine right direction Confirm the end of the ground spring surely fits the groove F of the shaft when reattaching 55 Slightly lift up the ISU and remove the ISU drive belt from the groove locking the ISU drive belt Groove for locking the ISU drive belt ISU drive belt Figure 1 5 117 1 5 72 56 Remove the FFC wire connecting to the ISU from the wire alignment part in the scanner unit Take off the bending part of the FFC wire from the two double sided tapes on the wire alignment part Detach the ISU Then peel off the double sided tapes and clean the affixing part to remove the adhesive 2PV 2PW 2 ISU Double sided tape Figure 1 5 118 1 5 73 Attaching the new ISU 57
105. 2 24V3 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 24 V DC 2 3 10 Ground Paper feeder clock signal Paper feeder ready signal Paper feeder serial communication data signal input Paper feeder serial communication data signal output 3 3 V DC power to paper feeder Ground Paper feeder selection signal Paper feeder selection signal Paper feeder selection signal 24 V DC power to paper feeder 2PV 2PW Connector Pin Signal Voltage Description YC34 1 TNSENM Analog TS M detection voltage Connectedto 2 ERASECDR 0 24VDC CL C On Off relay 3 TNSENK Analog TS K detection voltage 4 ERASEMDR 0 24V DC CL M On Off 5 DLPTHERM Analog DEVTH detection voltage 6 ERASEKDR O 0 24V DC CL K On Off 7 3 3V2 3 3VDC 3 3 V DC power to DRRPWB 8 EECLK 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM clock signal 9 GND 10 EEDATA 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM data signal 11 TNSENY Analog TS Y detection voltage 12 ERASEYDR 0 24V DC CL Y On Off 13 TNSENC Analog TS C detection voltage YC35 1 DLPDIRN 0 3 3V DC DEVRSW On Off Connectedto 2 GND Ground 2 s 3 DLPCMOTA 24 0 V DC DEVRM Forward Stop Reverse release switch and 4 DLPCMOTB 24 0 V DC DEVRM Reverse Stop Forward developing release motor YC36 1 LSUMOTA 24 0 V DC LSUCM Forward Stop Revers
106. 2 1024 KB RAM disk capacity S6 0101024 MB 400 RAM disk S7 0 Disabled 0 1 Enabled Wide A4 T6 0 Off 0 1 On Line spacing UO Lines per inch integer value 6 U1 Lines per inch decimal value 0 Character spacing U2 Characters per inch integer value 10 U3 Characters per inch decimal value 0 Country code 06 0 US ASCII 41 1 France 2 Germany 3 UK 4 Denmark 5 Sweden 6 Italy 7 Spain 8 Japan 9 US Legal 10 IBM PC 850 Multilingual 11 IBM PC 860 Portuguese 12 IBM PC 863 Canadian French 13 IBM PC 865 Norwegian 14 Norway 15 Denmark 2 16 Spain 2 17 Latin America 50 99 HP PCL symbol set coding Code set at power up in U7 0 Same as the default emulation mode P1 53 daisywheel emulation 1 6 IBM PC 8 7 99 HP PCL symbol set coding Font pitch for fixedpitch scalable U8 Default font pitch integer value 10 font U9 Default font pitch decimal value 0 Font height for the default scal VO Integer value in 100 points 0 to 9 0 able font V1 Integer value in points 0 to 99 12 V2 decimal value in 1 100 points 0 25 50 75 0 2 4 5 2PV 2PW Item FRPO Setting values Factory setting Default scalable font V3 Name of typeface of up to 32 characters enclosed with single or double quotation marks Courier Default weight courier and letter Gothic V9 0 Courier 7 darkness Letter Gothic darkness 1 Courier 7 regular Letter Gothic darkness 4 Courier dark
107. 2NM94340 scanning section following automatic 302NM94330 adjustment in the scanner section Set up for obtaining the target value 302NM94340 302NM94330 1 3 42 2PV 2PW 3 Item No Description Method Table To Automaticary enter the target value Usually it adjusts here Set a specified original P N 302NM94340 on the platen Enter maintenance item U411 Select Target Select Auto and press the start key Select Table Press the start key Auto adjustment starts To manually enter the target value When adjustment is automatically impossible 1 Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original P N 302NM94340 exe cuting maintenance item U425 Set a specified original P N 302NM94340 on the platen Enter maintenance item U411 Select Target Select U425 and press the start key Select Table Press the start key Auto adjustment starts Method DP 1 Set a specified original P N 302NM94330 on the DP face up 2 Enter maintenance item U411 3 Select DP 4 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When automatic adjustment has normally completed OK is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment error code is displayed and operation stops Should this happen determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin ning Error Codes Codes Description 00 Automatic adjustment success 01
108. 3456789012345678901 0008 00 07 12345678 11223344 00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678 012345678901 2345678901 2345678901 0008 00 07 12345678 11223344 00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678 012345678901 2345678901 2345678901 0008 00 07 12345678 11223344 00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678 01234567890 12345678901 2345678901 0008 00 07 68 XXXXXXXX 69 2PT 81BR 001 010 ABCDEFGHIJ ABCDEFGHIJ 70 71 72 73 00070107FE 0700FEOOFE 0 3 74 75 0 1 0 2 5 76 77 78 1 5 79 80 1 81 1 15 47 82 83 11 84 85 ABCDEFGHIJ ABCDEFGHIJ ABCDEFGHIJ ABCDEFGHIJ XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Figure 1 3 19 1 3 84 Service items 2PV 2PW 3 Description Detail of service status page Description Supplement Firmware version System date Engine soft version Engine boot version Operation panel mask version Machine serial number Standard memory size Optional memory size Total memory size Local time zone Report output date Day Month Year hour minute NTP server name Presence or absence of the optional paper feeder 2 Installed Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional paper feeder 3 Installed Not Installed Presence or absence of the SSD Installed Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional memory card Installed Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional IC card authentication kit Installed Not Ins
109. 44 1111111 11 27 10 2009 03 11 2009 08 40 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 5 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 0 00 0 00 6 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Figure 1 3 18 1 3 83 2PV 2PW 3 Service items Description Service status page 2 Service Status Page MFP 2013 07 24 15 15 Firmware version 2PW_2000 000 000 2013 07 24 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX tS Engine Information Send Information 36 NVRAM Version _1F31225_1F31225 41 Date and Time 10 04 06 15 30 37 Scanner Version 2PW_1200 001 089 42 Address mail bjd ne jp 38 FAX Slot1 FAX BOOT Version 2PW 5000 001 001 FAX APL Version 2PW 5100 001 001 FAX IPL Version 2PW 5200 001 001 39 MAC Address 00 0 00 01 00 40 DP Counters Total 1234 1 2 43 44 45 100 100 46 0 0 0 0 0 47 0 0 0 0 0 48 0 0 0 0 49 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 F00 U00 0 0 0 0 0 30 30 70 70 abcde 1 0 1 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 66 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 67 12345678 11223344 00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678 0123456789012
110. 5 Drum section 1 Detaching and refitting the drum unit Procedure 1 Remove the intermediate transfer unit Drum unit K M C Y see page 1 5 22 2 Remove drum units K M C Y 3 Check or replace the drum unit and refit all the removed parts 27 ZAR XT xf Figure 1 5 30 1 5 21 2PV 2PW 1 5 6 Transfer Separation section 1 Detaching and refitting the intermediate transfer unit Toner container K M C Y 1 Open the inner tray and the paper con veying unit gt O v o E g c Q o gt E 12 N Procedure Figure 1 5 31 AR f 7 AL LU ip EN Container guide 3 Slide the container guide forward and then remove it Figure 1 5 32 1 5 22 2PV 2PW 4 Open the RFID holder Figure 1 5 33 5 Slide the shutter forward and seal the Screw K toner inlet 6 Remove the screw ge LR S VR k d I Figure 1 5 34 1 5 23 2PV 2PW 7 Remove the intermediate transfer unit 8 Check or replace the intermediate transfer unit and refit all the removed parts Intermediate transfer unit Figure 1 5 35 1 5 24 2PV 2PW 2 Detaching and refitting the transfer roller unit Procedure 1 Open the paper conveying unit s S 2 Release two hooks and then remove SJ C Transfer roller unit the transf
111. 70 1 dot Cassette1 Paper feed from optional cassette1 70 to 70 1 dot Cassette2 Paper feed from optional cassette2 70 to 70 1 dot Cassette3 Paper feed from optional cassette3 70 to 70 1 dot Duplex Duplex mode second 70 to 70 1 dot 5 Change the setting value using the cursor left rigrt keys or numeric keys For output example 1 increase the value For output example 2 decrease the value Center line of printing within 2 0 mm Correct image Output Output example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 3 6 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode 0067 0072 0854 P 1 3 22 P 1 3 27 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 18 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U065 Adjust Scanner Motor Speed Description Adjusts the magnification of the original scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is incorrect Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press the system menu key 3 Place an original and press the
112. A5 size reception gt 4 gt 5 Initial setting Off 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 72 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U699 Setting the software switches Description Sets the software switches on the FAX control PWB individually Purpose To change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs Since the communication performance is largely affected normally this setting need not be changed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press SW No 3 Enter the desired software switch number 3 digits using the numeric keys and press the enter key 4 Use numeric keys 7 to 0 to switch each bit between 0 and 1 5 Press the start key to set the value Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed List of Software Switches of Which the Setting Can Be Changed lt Communication control procedure gt No Bit Item 36 7654 Coding format in transmission 3210 Coding format in reception 37 5 33600 bps V34 4 31200 bps V34 3 28800 bps V34 2 26400 bps V34 24000 bps V34 21600 bps V34 19200 bps V34 16800 bps V34 14400 bps V34 12000 bps V34 9600 bps V34 7200 bps V34 4800 bps V34 2400 bps V34 FSK detection in V 8 4800 bps w
113. AX country code FAX Country Code Description Initializes software switches and all data in the backup data on the FAX control PWB according to the destination Purpose To initialize the FAX control PWB Method Enter the Service Setting menu Select FAX Country Code using the cursor up down keys Press the start key Enter a destination code using the numeric keys Press the start key The setting is set Press the start key Data initialization starts Destination code list Code Destination Destination 000 007 009 022 038 080 084 088 097 108 115 126 136 137 152 156 159 169 181 Japan Argentina Australia Brazil China Hong Kong Indonesia Israel Korea Malaysia Mexico New Zealand Peru Philippines Saudi Arabiat Singapore South Africa Thailand U S A Russia CTR21 European nations Italy Germany Spain U K Netherlands Sweden France Austria Switzerland Belgium Denmark Finland Portugal Ireland Norway Taiwan Completion Press the stop key 1 3 95 Service items 2PV 2PW Description FAX call Setting FAX call setting Description Selects if a fax is to be connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network Selects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX Access code registration for connection to PSTN Purpose To be executed as required Method 1 Enter the Service
114. C DEVPWB Y DEVPWB C DEVPWB M DEVPWB K WaAaHLd1d MNASNL INNASNL ONASNL ANASNL V 9DA 7 994 c LOA lt 0 2 TELDA DRRPWB EL LOA LL LOA G LOA b LOA DEVRSW DLPDIRN DLPCMOTA B 3 4 5 DLPMOTREN DLPMOTCLK 1 ONASNL ANASNL 1 1 MNASNL INNASNL YC14 3 YC13 4 V G 2A b SEDA EL VEDA LL VEDA G VEDA VEIA b VEDA YC13 5 DLPMOTRDYN EPWB Figure 2 1 10 Developing section block diagram 2 1 10 2PV 2PW 2 1 4 Optical section The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning and the laser scanner section for print ing 1 Image scanner section The original image is illuminated by the LED and scanned by the CCD image sensor in the CCD PWB CCD PWB via the five mirrors and ISU lens the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal If a document processor is used the image scanner unit stops at the position of the DP contact glass and scans sequentially one row of the image on the original in synchronization with the moving timing of the origi nal in the sub scan direction by driving the DP EE dr Figure 2 1 11 Scanner unit 1 Contact glass 6 ISU belt 2 DP contact glass 7 ISU shaft 3 Original size indicator plate 8 Image scanner unit ISU 4 ISU top frame 9 Home position sensor H
115. C21 Connected to cassette PWB GND PAPVOL2 PAPVOL1 LIFTSEN 3 3V2 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC Ground Not used PS On Off LS On Off 3 3 V DC power to CPWB Connected to toner motor K 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 24V3 TNMKDRN 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TM K TM K On Off YC24 Connected to toner motor M 24V3 TNMMDRN 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TM M TM M On Off YC25 Connected to toner motor C 24V3 TNMCDRN 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TM C TM C On Off YC26 Connected to toner motor Y 24V3 TNMYDRN 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 2 3 8 24 V DC power to TM Y TM Y On Off 2PV 2PW Connector Pin Signal Voltage Description YC27 1 LMOTDRN 0 24 V DC LM On Off Connectedto 2 GND Ground lift motor YC28 1 24V1 24VDC 24 V DC power to CFM Connectedto 2 TCONTFAN 0 12 24 V DC CFM Full speed Half speed Off container fan DRN motor YC29 1 24 1 24VDC 24 V DC power to LFM Connectedto 2 LFANDRN 10 12 24 V DC LFM Full speed Half speed Off left fan motor YC30 1 TOPOPN 0 3 3 V DC ITSW On Off Connectedto 2 GND Ground inner tray switch YC31 1 GND Ground Connectedto 2 N C Not used UN 3 LONBKN O 0 3 3V DC APCPWB K sample hold signal 4 ENBKN 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB K laser enable signal 5 PDKN 0 3 3 V DC
116. Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures Developing release motor error When the developing release motor is driven the motor over current detection signal is detected continuously for 8 times 800 ms at 100 ms intervals Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Developing release motor and engine PWB YC35 Defective drive transmission sys tem of the develop ing release motor Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective develop ing release motor Replace the developing release motor Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Developing release motor time out error When the developing release motor is driven the develop ing release switch DEVRSW is not detectable for 1 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Developing release motor and engine PWB YC35 Defective drive transmission sys tem of the develop ing release motor Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and rep
117. Defective drive transmission sys tem of the PF lift motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective PF lift motor Replace the PF lift motor Defective PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB Refer to the ser vice manual for the paper feeder PF heater 1 high tempera ture error paper feeder 1 A temperature higher than 75 C 167 F is detected Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF fan motor 1 and PF main PWB YC111 Shorted PF therm istor 1 Replace the top heater unit Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Defective PF fan motor 1 Replace the top heater unit Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Defective PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB Refer to the ser vice manual for the paper feeder PF heater 2 high tempera ture error paper feeder 1 A temperature higher than 75 C 167 F is detected Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF fan motor 2 and PF main PWB YC111 Shorted PF therm istor 2 Replace the side heater unit Refer to the service manual for the paper
118. Figure 2 1 17 Intermediate transfer unit section block diagram 2 1 17 2PV 2PW 2 Secondary transfer roller section The secondary transfer roller section consists of the secondary transfer roller mounted to the paper conveying unit and the separation brush To the secondary transfer roller DC bias is applied from the high voltage PWB HVPWB The toner image formed on the transfer belt is transferred to the paper by the potential difference and the paper is separated by curvature separation Figure 2 1 18 Secondary transfer roller section 1 Secondary transfer roller 2 Brush holder 3 Paper chute guide 4 Separation brush ue HVPWB EPWB Secondary N i e Nod transfer bias YC11 7 KO 1 2 Secondary transfer roller Figure 2 1 19 Secondary transfer roller section block diagram 2 1 18 2PV 2PW 2 1 6 Fuser section The paper sent from the transfer separation section is interleaved between the heat roller and the press roller The heat roller is heated by the fuser heater FH and the toner is fused by heat and pressure and fixed onto the paper because the press roller is pressed by the fuser press spring The surface temperature of heat roller is detected by the fuser thermistor FTH and controlled by the engine PWB EPWB If the fuser section shows extremely high temperature the power line will be shut off and the fus
119. Level 2 Middle coverage threshold value Setting Rate Purpose To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4 Letter size 1 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting Rate Size coefficient 0 1 to 3 0 1 0 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting Mode Purpose Make settings on the color copy and color print color coverage counter displays 1 Select the mode Display Description 0 Full color count display 1 Color coverage count display Initial setting 0 If 0 has been changed to 1 revert the U260 feed eject counter switch to its initial state Eject 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting Level 1 2 Purpose Setting the coverage thresholds to segment the color count depending on the density level of 1 2 and 3 for the counters of color copying and color printing The coverage threshold will be used to categorize the following counters when using U920 Color Copy H Color Copy M Color Copy L Color Prn H Color Prn M Color Prn L 1 3 35 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U332 1 Select the item 2 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting Level 1 Low coverage threshold value 0 1 to 99 8 1 0 Level 2 Middle coverage threshol
120. M 5 Inner tray lever 14 Toner container C 6 Paper stopper 15 Toner container Y 7 Inner tray 16 Waste toner cover 8 MP Multi Purpose tray 17 Waste toner box 9 Cassette 18 Lock release button 1 1 6 2PV 2PW 2 Machine rear side 20 2 TAR e N 1 2 Figure 1 26 USB memory slot 19 Rear cover 27 USB interface connector 20 Rear cover lever 21 IF cover 28 Network interface connector 29 LINE connector 30 TEL connector 22 Memory cover 23 Power cord cover 24 Paper conveying unit 4 in 1 model with FAX only 25 Power cord connector 1 1 7 2PV 2PW 3 Document processor Figure 1 1 3 DP top cover Original width guides Original table Original eject table Switchback table Original stopper Opening Handle 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 1 1 8 4 Operation panel gt 2PV 2PW 1 2 10 16 es Cancel Bot _ Auto Color pecan Send Sf 13 n n 15 2 6 4 Full Color 5 6 7 5
121. OKN Analog 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse LVDS LVDS Analog 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse LVDS LVDS Ground APCPWB M Laser power reference voltage 3 3 V DC power to APCPWB M Horizontal synchronizing signal APCPWB M video data signal APCPWB M video data signal Ground APCPWB K Laser power reference voltage 3 3 V DC power to APCPWB K Horizontal synchronizing signal APCPWB K video data signal APCPWB K video data signal Connected to relay PWB DOO A OO N gt 3 3V1_MFP I2CSDA GND I2CSCL SCKN SO S SDIR SBSY EGIRN VSYNC 3 3V2 GND EGHOLD I2CINT 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 2 3 16 3 3 V DC power to RYPWB EEPROM data signal Ground EEPROM clock signal Serial communication clock signal Serial communication data signal input Serial communication data signal output Serial communication direction change signal Serial busy signal Engine interruption signal Vertical synchronizing signal 3 3 V DC power to RYPWB Ground Engine hold signal Not used Connector Signal Voltage 2PV 2PW 3 Description YC39 Connected to relay PWB HYPINT PSSLEEPN 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC Sleep return signal On Off Sleep mode signal On Off YC40 Connected to laser scanner un
122. PF fan motor 2 Replace the side heater unit Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Defective PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB Refer to the ser vice manual for the paper feeder PF heater 1 low temperature error paper feeder 1 An external temperature higher than 5 C 9 F is not detected when one minute elapses after PF heater 1 is turned on Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF heater 1 and PF heater PWB YC1 PF heater PWB YC3 and PF main PWB YC113 PF thermistor 1 and PF main PWB YC114 PF thermistor 1 installed incor rectly Check the installation of the PF thermistor 1 Defective PF thermistor 1 Replace the top heater unit Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Broken PF heater 1 Replace the top heater unit Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Defective PF heater PWB or PF main PWB 1 4 11 Replace the PF heater PWB or PF main PWB Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Contents Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures PF heater 2 low temperature error paper feeder 1 An external temperature higher than 5 C 9 F is not detected when one minute elapses after PF heater 2 is turned on Defective connec tor cable o
123. PROM data signal 5 NC Not used 6 3 3V2 O 33VDC 3 3 V DC power to DRPWB K 7 DAO Not used 8 DA1 Not used YC3 1 GND Ground Connectedto 2 EECLK 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM clock signal drum PWBM ERASEMDR O 0 24VDC CL M On Off 4 EEDATA 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM data signal 5 NC Not used 6 3 3V2 O 33VDC 3 3 V DC power to DRPWB M 7 DAO Ground 8 DA1 Not used YC4 1 GND Ground Connectedto 2 EECLK 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM clock signal drum PWB C ERASECDR 0 24VDC CL C On Off 4 EEDATA 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM data signal 5 NC Not used 6 3 3V2 O 33VDC 3 3 V DC power to DRPWB C 7 DAO Not used 8 DA1 Ground 2 3 21 2PV 2PW Connector Pin Signal Voltage Description 5 1 GND Ground Connectedto 2 EECLK 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM clock signal drumPWB Y 3 ERASEYDR 0 24VDC CL Y On Off 4 EEDATA 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM data signal 5 NC Not used 6 3 3V2 O 33VDC 3 3 V DC power to DRPWB Y 7 DAO Ground 8 DA1 Ground YC6 1 GND Ground Connectedto 2 TNSENK Analog TS K detection voltage ees 3 3 3V2 O 33VDC 3 3 V DC power to DEVPWB K 4 DLPTHERM Analog DEVTH detection voltage YC7 1 GND Ground Connectedto 2 TNSENM Analog TS M detection voltage ae 3 3 3V2 3 3V DC 3 3 V DC power to DEVPWB M 4
124. PS 5 ISU bottom frame 10 ISU motor ISUM 2 1 11 314 4 2PV 2PW 13 1 Figure 2 1 12 Image scanner unit ISU Unit cover ISU housing Reflector Transparent material Mirror A Mirror B Mirror C Mirror D 2 1 12 Mirror E 10 11 12 13 14 15 ISU lens CCD PWB CCDPWB DriverPWB DRPWB LED PWB LEDPWB LED Home position sensor HPS Contact glass Original 2PV 2PW Image scanner unit ISU CCDPWB irrors To 77 7 Ecc CO MPWB VI sensor 16 HPSWN HPS SCMOTB2 SCMOTA1 YC36 1 2 3 4 SCMOTB1 SCMOTA2 Scanner unit Figure 2 1 13 Scanner unit block diagram 2 1 13 2PV 2PW 2 Laser scanner section The charged surface of the drum is then scanned by the laser beam from the laser scanner unit The laser beam is dispersed as the polygon motor PM revolves to reflect the laser beam over the drum Various lenses and mirror are housed in the laser scanner unit adjust the diameter of the laser beam and focalize it at the drum surface Also the LSU cleaning motor LSUCM is activated to conduct automatically cleaning of the LSU dust shield glass
125. PSTN PBX Connected to the public switched telephone network Connected to a PBX Initial setting PSTN 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting PSTN dial tone detection Selects if the dial tone is detected to check the telephone is off the hook when a fax is connected to a public switched telephone network 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display On Off Description Detects the dial tone Does not detect the dial tone Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set 1 3 69 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U660 Setting busy tone detection When a fax signal is sent sets whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected or the busy tone is not detected and the line remains connected until TO time out time Fax transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection When set to 2 this problem may be prevented However the line is not disconnected within the TO time out time even if the desti nation line is busy 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description On Detects busy tone Off Does not detect busy tone Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting for a PBX Selects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX According to the type of the PBX connected select the mode to connect an
126. PW Check procedures corrective measures VIDEO ASIC device error Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Main PWB YC39 and relay PWB YC3 Relay PWB YC2 4 and engine PWB YC8 9 Defective main PWB or engine PWB Replace the main PWB or the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 30 1 5 27 Broken cleaning lamp K wire When the cleaning lamp K is driven the lamp over current detection signal is detected continuously for 10 times 1 s at 100 ms intervals Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Drum unit K and Drum relay PWB YC2 Drum relay PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC34 Defective cleaning lamp K Replace the drum unit K see page 1 5 21 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Broken cleaning lamp C wire When the cleaning lamp C is driven the lamp over current detection signal is detected continuously for 10 times 1 s at 100 ms intervals Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Drum unit
127. Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF lift motor and PF main PWB YC7 Defective drive transmission sys tem of the PF lift motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective PF lift motor Replace the PF lift motor Defective PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB Refer to the ser vice manual for the paper feeder 1 4 9 Contents Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures PF lift motor error paper feeder 2 When the lift motor is driven the motor over current detec tion signal is detected continu ously for 50 times 5 s at 100 ms intervals After the lift motor is driven the ON status of lift sensor cannot be detected for 8 s The cassette installed confir mation message is displayed on the operation panel and even if the cassette is opened and closed the cassette installed confirmation mes sage is displayed 5 times suc cessively Defective bottom plate elevation mechanism in the cassette Check to see if the bottom plate can move smoothly and repair it if any problem is found Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF lift motor and PF main PWB YC7
128. S WSS SAE NS NS 7 x lt NS S ic N Figure 1 5 92 7 x J df 1 5 58 21 Remove left and right holders from the scanner unit When reattaching the holders in the scan ner unit assemble the parts so that the holders are in front of the triangle ribs of the ISU frame If the holders are behind the triangle ribs the scanner unit cannot be closed 22 Release four hooks and remove the upper middle cover 2PV 2PW 2 Scanner unit Holder i Attachment of the right holder Normal Wrong Holder Triangle ribs Figure 1 5 93 Upper middle cover Figure 1 5 94 1 5 59 Detach the high voltage PWB HVU PWB 23 24 25 If trying to pull out the PWB on the way of 2PV 2PW 2 Remove the screw Release four hooks of the upside of the PWB circled in the figure and slant the upside of the high voltage PWB like opening it and then remove the FFC After surely slanting the high voltage PWB till ninety degree pull it out toward the machine right side E iq High voltage PWB slanting till ninety degree the hooks securing the PWB s low side may dam age The hooks are circled at the figure Hook A Hook A
129. SP CCDRSN NC CCDPH1N CCDPH1P NC CCDPH2P CCDPH2N NC 3 3VS HPSWN NC 24V_LAMP LAMPTH GND_LAMP NC GND CCDDATAB GND CCDDATAG GND CCDDATAR GND NC 5V1 NC 12VS 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC LVDS LVDS LVDS LVDS LVDS LVDS LVDS LVDS 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 24 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 2 3 14 CCD color BW change signal CCD shift gate signal CCD clamp signal CCD clamp signal Not used CCD reset signal CCD reset signal Not used CCD shift register clock signal CCD shift register clock signal Not used CCD shift register clock signal CCD shift register clock signal Not used 3 3 V DC power to CCDPWB HPS On Off Not used 24 V DC power to CCDPWB EL drive signal Ground Not used Ground CCD image output signal B Ground CCD image output signal G Ground CCD image output signal R Ground Not used 5 V DC power to CCDPWB Not used 12 V DC power to CCDPWB 2PV 2PW 3 Connector Pin Signal Voltage Description YC16 1 VDD5 3 3VDC 3 3 V DC power to FCPWB Connectedto 2 GND Ground LE 3 RESETN 0 33 V DC Reset signal 4 VDD5 CUT O 33VDC 3 3 V DC power to FCPWB 5 GND Ground 6 WAKEUP 0 3 3 V DC Control signal 7 AUDIO Analog Audio signal 8 RESERVE 9 RESERVE 10 RESERVE 11 GND Ground 12 RESERVE 13 RESERVE 14 GND Ground 15 RESERVE 16 RESERVE 17 GND Ground 18
130. Setting menu 2 Select FAX Call Set using the cursor up down keys 3 Press the start key Display Description Exchange Select Setting the connection to PBX PSTN PBX Setting Setting for a PBX Dial No to PSTN Setting access code to PSTN Setting the connection to PBX PSTN 1 Select Exchange Select using the cursor up down keys 2 Press the start key 3 Select PBX or PSTN using the cursor up down keys 4 Press the start key The setting is set Setting for PBX 1 Select PBX Setting using the cursor up down keys 2 Press the start key 3 Select Loop Flash or Earth using the cursor up down keys 4 Press the start key The setting is set Setting access code to PSTN 1 Select Dial No to PSTN using the cursor up down keys 2 Press the start key 3 Enter access code using the numeric keys 0 to 9 00 to 99 4 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key 1 3 96 2PV 2PW 2 Service items Description Remote Setting remote diagnostics diagnostics Description Sets the remote diagnostics Purpose Used to establish communication between the machine and the service facility when a problem is encounted Method Enter the Service Setting menu Select Remote Diag Set using the cursor up down keys Press the start key Select On using the cursor up down keys Press the start key The setting is set Select Remote Diag ID using the
131. TP POP3 server The server cannot establish communi cation Check the SMTP POP3 server name Check the SMTP POP3 port number Confirm device s network parameters Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected Check the SMTP POP3 server Connection to the SMTP POP3 server has failed Confirm device s network parameters Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected Connection to the SMTP POP3 server has failed Timeout Confirm device s network parameters Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected The size of scanning exceeded its limit Confirm device s network parameters SMTP POP3 server responded with an error Confirm device s network parameters 2 Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected Check the SMTP POP3 server Error Server Response Check the SMTP POP3 server Wait a minute and trye again 1 4 45 2PV 2PW 3 Contents Check procedures corrective measures No SMTP authentication is found 1 Check the SMTP server 2 The device supports SMTP authentication services including CRAM MD5 DIGEST MD5 PLAIN and LOGIN Failed to establish the SSL session Verify the self certificate of the device 2 Check the server certificate of the SMTP POP3 server Check the SMTP POP3 configuration of the device and the SMTP POP3 server 1 4 46 2PV 2PW 1 4 7 E
132. Top 1 Press the system menu key 2 Press the start key to output a test pattern 3 Press the system menu key 4 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Top Standard value 0 to 1180 600 1dot MPT Paper feed from MP tray 70 to 70 0 1dot Cassette Paper feed from cassette 70 to 70 0 1dot Display Description Duplex Duplex mode second 70 to 70 0 1dot 5 Change the setting value using the cursor left rigrt keys or numeric keys For output example 1 increase the value For output example 2 decrease the value Leading edge registration 20 1 0 mm Correct image Output Output example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 2 6 Press the start key The value is set 1 3 17 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U034 Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U066 U071 034 P 1 3 21 P 1 3 25 Adjustment LSU Out Left 1 Press the system menu key 2 Press the start key to output a test pattern 3 Press the system menu key 4 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in Display Description range setting value per step Left Standard value 0 to 1180 600 1 dot MPT Paper feed from MP tray 70 to
133. a 4 STDUB 112 STDUAN Is STDUBN Figure 2 1 23 Eject Feed shift section block diagram 2 1 22 2PV 2PW 2 1 8 Duplex conveying section The duplex conveying section consists of conveying path which sends the paper sent from the eject feedshift section to the paper feed conveying section when duplex printing V CO N i 4 5 0 E 3 Figure 2 1 24 Duplex conveying section 1 Duplex roller L 4 Duplex pulleys 2 Eject pulley 5 Duplex frame 3 Duplex rollers S 6 Duplex feed guide 2 1 23 FUSPAP STDUA Ja STDUB STDUAN STDUBN 24 2PV 2PW N a poo 4 ee x V 1 1 1 B i N 1 1 i F 1 1 m 1 i 1 i x od i i i i i i Kw i i i CR CIIM i ar a s I Figure 2 1 25 Duplex conveying section block diagram 2 1 24 2 1 9 Document processor 1 Original feed section 2PV 2PW The original feed section consists of the parts shown in figure An original placed on the original table is con veyed to the original conveying section Original is fed by the rotation of the DP forwarding pulley and DP feed pulley Figure 2 1 26 Original f
134. a line can be disconnected Change the setting to prevent this problem 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys Description Setting range Initial setting TO time out time 30 to 90 s 56 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting the T1 time out time Sets the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception No change is necessary for this maintenance item 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys Description Setting range Initial setting T1 time out time 30 to 90 s 36 2 Press the start key The value is set 1 3 64 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U641 Setting the T2 time out time The T2 time out time decides the following From CFR signal output to image data reception From image data reception to the next signal reception In ECM from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys Description Setting Initial Change in value range setting per step T2 time out time 1 to 255 69 100 ms 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting the Ta time out time In the fax telephone auto select mode sets the time to continue ringing an operator through the connected telephone after receiving a call as a fax machine see figure 1 3 17 A fax signal is received within the Ta set time or the fax mode is selected automatically when the time ela
135. ables caught To reassemble the parts use the original screws If the types and the sizes of screws are not known refer to the PARTS LIST 2 Drum Note the following when handling or storing the drum When removing the drum unit never expose the drum surface to strong direct light Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between 20 C 4 F and 40 C 104 F and at a relative humidity not higher than 85 RH Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum Do not touch the drum surface with any object Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil clean it 3 Toner Store the toner container in a cool dark place Avoid direct light and high humidity 1 5 1 2PV 2PW 4 How to tell a genuine Kyocera toner container As a means of brand protection the Kyocera toner container utilizes an optical security technology to enable visual validation A validation viewer is required to accomplish this Hold the validation viewer over the left side part of the brand protection seal on the toner container Through each window of the validation viewer the left side part of the seal should be seen as follows A black colored band when seen through the left side window A shiny or gold colored band when seen through the right side window 55 The above will reveal that the toner container is a genuine Kyocera branded toner container ot
136. alue of a trailing 265 0 to 267 0 266 0 edge Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A B and C Measurement procedure 1 Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A 30 mm from the left edge B 105 mm from the left edge and C 180 mm from the left edge respectively 2 Apply the following formula for the values obtained A B C 3 Enter the values solved using the cursor right left keys or numeric keys in Dist Press the start key The value is set Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F Measurement procedure 1 Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F 21 mm from the top edge of black belt 1 Enter the values using the cursor right left keys or numeric keys in Dist2 Press the start key The value is set Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the original at D and E 1 Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the original at D 30 mm from the left edge and E 180 mm from the left edge respectively 2 Apply the following formula for the values obtained D 2 E 2 8 Enter the measured value using the cursor right left keys or numeric keys in Dist3 Press the start key The value is set 30mm 105
137. and then remove the main PWB 15 Check or replace the main PWB and refit all the removed parts Main PWB Figure 1 5 51 1 5 34 2PV 2PW 4 Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB Procedure 1 Remove the right rear cover and right cover see page 1 5 6 2 Remove the FFC from the high voltage PWB CLA v d 25 3 Remove the screw 4 Release eight hooks and then remove the high voltage PWB 5 Check or replace the high voltage PWB and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 53 1 5 35 2PV 2PW 5 Detaching and refitting the FAX control PWB 4 in 1 model with FAX only Procedure 1 Remove the IF cover see page 1 5 3 2 Remove two screws and then remove the FAX control PWB 3 Check or replace the FAX control PWB and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 54 1 5 36 1 5 9 Drive section 1 Detaching and refitting the MP feed drive unit Procedure 1 Remove the rear upper cover right upper cover left upper cover and front cover see page 1 5 3 Remove the right rear cover and right cover see page 1 5 6 Remove the left rear cover left cover and left lower cover see page 1 5 9 Remove the inner cover see page 1 5 11 Remove the engine PWB see page 1 5 27 Release three hooks and th
138. ar cover left cover and left lower cover see page 1 5 9 3 Remove connector YC3 from engine PWB Engine PWB Engine PWB Figure 1 5 60 4 Remove four screws and then remove lt lt vA x BS Y the paper feed drive unit lt ON s 9 N HOS 5 Check replace the paper feed drive b S Dae O unit and refit all the removed parts VAS Paper feed drive unit Screw Screw Figure 1 5 61 1 5 40 4 Detaching and refitting the fuser pressure drive unit Procedure 1 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 26 2 Remove the rear upper cover right upper cover left upper cover and front cover see page 1 5 3 3 Remove the left rear cover and left cover see page 1 5 9 4 Remove connector YC38 from engine PWB 2PV 2PW
139. base version d Consistency of the present software version and the ME firmware version _ underscore OK Asterisk NG e ME firmware version f The oldest time stamp of the ME database ver sion Normal if a and d are underscored and b and e are identical with c and f Scanner firmware version Fax firmware version Mac address DP counter Total number of sheets first side and second side The last sent date and time Transmission address Destination information Area information Margin settings Top margin Left margin 1 3 86 Service items 2PV 2PW 3 Description Description Supplement Top offset MP tray Paper feeder 1 Paper feeder 2 Duplex Reversal Left offset MP tray Paper feeder 1 Paper feeder 2 Duplex Reversal Margin Page length Page width settings Top margin integer part Top margin decimal part Left margin integer part Left margin decimal part Life counter The first line Machine life MP tray Cassette Paper feeder 1 Paper feeder 2 Duplex Life counter The second line Drum unit K Drum unit C Drum unit M Drum unit Y Intermediate transfer unit Panel lock information FOO OFF F01 to F03 Partial lock F04 Full lock USB information 00 Not installed 01 Full speed 02 Hi speed Paper handling information 0 Paper source unit select 1 Paper source unit Auto cassette c
140. code Description U00900 An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error U00910 A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode 1 4 50 2PV 2PW 2 5 U010XX error code table G3 transmission Error code Description U01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps Or an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal excluding EOP after transmission at 2400 bps U01001 Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DIS signal U01016 An MCF signal was received but no DIS signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal and T1 timeout was detected U01019 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal and the preset num ber of command retransfers was exceeded between units of our make U01020 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal and the preset num ber of command retransfers was exceeded ECM U01021 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOR Q signal and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded ECM U01022 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an RR signal and the preset num ber of command retransfers was exceeded ECM U01028 T5 time out was detected during ECM transmission ECM U01052 A DCN signal was received after transmiss
141. d Code of maintenance replacing item 1 byte 2 categories First byte Replacing item 01 Toner container Second byte Type of replacing item 00 Black 01 Cyan 02 Magenta 03 Yellow First byte Replacing item 02 Maintenance kit Second byte Type of replacing item 01 MK 590 592 594 26 28 ppm model only Item No Description 2PV 2PW U000 Items Description Unknown Toner Log Count Item Remembers 1 to 5 of occurrence of unknown toner detection If the occurrence of the previous unknown toner detection is less than 5 all of the unknown toner detection are logged The total page count at the time of the toner empty error with using an unknown toner con tainer Unknown toner log code 1 byte 2 categories First byte 01 Toner container Fixed Second byte 00 Black 01 Cyan 02 Magenta 03 Yellow Counter Log Comprised of three log coun ters including paper jams self diagnostics errors and replacement of the toner con tainer f Paper jam g Self diagnostic error h Maintenance item replacing Indicates the log counter of paper jams depending on location Refer to Paper Jam Log All instances includ ing those are not occurred are dis played 1 3 11 Indicates the log counter of self diag nostics errors depending on cause See page 1 4 7 Example C6000 4 Self diagnost
142. d EEPROM data signal MPPCS On Off 3 3 V DC power to RYPWB 2PV 2PW Connector Pin Signal Voltage Description YC10 1 LEDA 3 3V DC 3 3 V DC power to WTS Connectedto 2 LEDK 0 3 3 V DC pulse WTS LED emitter signal waste toner 3 BERE Analog WTS detection signal sensor 4 PTRC O 3 3VDC 3 3 V DC power to WTS YC11 1 24V3 O 24V DC 24 V DC power to HVPWB Connectedto 2 24V3 O 24V DC 24 V DC power to HVPWB high voltage 3 T1CCNT PWM Primary transfer bias control voltage PWB Cyan 4 HVCLKY 0 3 3 V DC pulse Developing bias clock signal Yellow T1MCNT PWM Primary transfer bias control voltage Magenta 6 HVCLKC 0 3 3 V DC pulse Developing bias clock signal Cyan 7 T2CNT PWM Secondary transfer bias control voltage 8 BCMCNT PWM Developing magnet roller bias control voltage Cyan Cleaning bias control voltage 10 BKMCNT PWM Developing magnet roller bias control voltage Black 11 T1YCNT PWM Primary transfer bias control voltage Yellow 12 BKSCNT O PWM Developing sleeve roller bias control voltage Black 13 T1KCNT PWM Primary transfer bias control voltage Black 14 BYSCNT PWM Developing sleeve roller bias control voltage Yellow 15 MYCNT PWM Charger roller control voltage Yellow 16 BMMCNT PWM Developing magnet roller bias control voltage Magenta 17 MKCNT Charger roller control
143. d value 0 2 to 99 9 2 5 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the value for maintenance due indication Description Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached by setting the number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance count reaches the set value the message is displayed Purpose To change the time for maintenance due indication Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select Cnt using the cursor up down keys 3 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys Description Setting range Initial setting Time for maintenance due indication 0 to 9999 0 Remaining number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends 4 Press the start key The value is set Clearing 1 Select Clear using the cursor up down keys 2 Press the start key The value is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 36 2PV 2PW Item No Description 0346 Selecting Sleep Mode Description Switches configurations for sleep modes Purpose Use this to switch configurations for sleep modes Method 1 Press th
144. device is accidentally switched off or the USB memory is disconnected and upgrading was incomplete upgrading is retried when turning the main power switch on next time Insert USB memory and turn the main power switch on to perform steps 3 to 8 as the above Emergency UPDATE If Safe UPDATE is not successful in upgrading the message below appears In that case retry upgrading after recovering the software by following the procedure below Preparation The USB memory must be formatted in FAT or FAT32 in advance Extract the main firmware to download from the file Rename the file which was extracted from the archive DL CTRL 2PW to KM EMRG 2PW Copy the all extracted files to the root of the USB memory Procedure 1 Turn the main power switch off 2 Insert the USB memory which contains the firmware into the USB memory slot 3 Turn the main power switch on 4 Rewriting of the PWB software will start 6 T 8 10 11 12 for restoration Emergency Update is displayed on the LCD of the operation panel Completed will be displayed when rewriting is successful Failed will be displayed when rewrit ing is failed Turn the main power switch off Wait for several seconds and then remove the USB memory from the USB memory slot Extract the firmware to download from the archive and copy to the root of the formatted USB memory NOTE Deletes the ES SKIP on file When it is contained directl
145. does not turn ON Paper feeder 1 4203 Eject sensor does not turn ON Paper feeder 2 4204 Eject sensor does not turn ON Paper feeder 3 4208 Eject sensor does not turn ON Duplex 4209 Eject sensor does not turn ON MP tray 4211 Eject sensor does not turn OFF Cassette 4212 Eject sensor does not turn OFF Paper feeder 1 4213 Eject sensor does not turn OFF Paper feeder 2 4214 Eject sensor does not turn OFF Paper feeder 3 4218 Eject sensor does not turn OFF Duplex 4219 Eject sensor does not turn OFF MP tray 4220 Eject sensor is turned ON b Detail of paper source Hexadecimal 00 MP tray 01 Cassette 1 02 Cassette 2 paper feeder 1 03 Cassette 3 paper feeder 2 04 Cassette 4 paper feeder 3 05 to 09 Reserved c Detail of paper size Hexadecimal 00 Not specified OB B4 Special 1 01 Monarch 0 Ledger Special 2 02 Business 00 03 International DL OE Ledger wide 04 International C5 OF B6 Full bleed paper 05 Executive 10 Commercial 9 12 x 8 06 Letter R 11 Commercial 6 8K 86 Letter E 12 ISO B5 16K R 07 Legal 13 Custom size 16K E 08 A4R 1E C4 Statement R 88 A4E 1F Postcard Statement E 09 5 20 Reply paid post Folio 89 B5E card Western type 2 21 Oficio II Western type 4 1 3 9 Item No Description 2PV 2PW U000 Items Description Pa
146. e Connectedto 2 LSUMOTB 24 0 V DC LSUCM Reverse Stop Forward LSU clean ing motor YC37 1 STDUBN 0 24 V DC pulse DUM drive control signal Connectedto 2 STDUAN 0 24 V DC pulse DUM drive control signal duplex motor 3 STDUB 0 24 V DC pulse DUM drive control signal 4 STDUA 0 24 V DC pulse DUM drive control signal YC38 1 PREMOTDRN 0 24V DC FPRM On Off Connectedto 2 GND Ground fuser pres sure release motor YC40 1 24V1 24V DC 24 V DC power to FUFM Connectedto 2 FUFANDRN 0 12 24 V DC FUFM Full speed Half speed Off fuser fan motor 2 3 11 Connector Signal Voltage 2PV 2PW Description YC42 GND Ground Connected to outer temper ature sensor A N AIRTEMP WETCLKO WETCLK1 AIRWETOUT Analog 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse Analog 2 3 12 OTEMS detection voltage temperature OTEMS clock signal OTEMS clock signal OTEMS detection voltage humidity 2PV 2PW 3 2 3 3 Main PWB A4 B1B4 YC119 B3 R1 R1 1211 YC2004 L R10R9 L4L3 1 YC2000 10 Figure 2 3 3 Main PWB silk screen diagram 2 3 13 Connector Signal Voltage 2PV 2PW 2 Description YC8 Connected to CCD PWB c N DOO A OO N gt CCDSW CCDSH CCDCLPN CCDCLPP NC CCDR
147. e refer to 1 4 50 0008 error code table U009XX A page reception error occurred in G3 mode refer to 1 4 50 U009XX error code table U010XX Transmission in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error refer to 1 4 51 0010 error code table U011XX Reception in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error refer to 1 4 52 U011XX error code table U01400 An invalid one touch key was specified during communication U01500 A communication error occurred when calling in V 8 mode U01600 A communication error occurred when called in V 8 mode 0017 A communication error occurred before starting T 30 protocol during transmission V 34 mode refer to 1 4 53 U017XX error code table 0018 communication error occurred before starting T 30 protocol during reception V 34 mode refer to 1 4 53 U018XX error code table U03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started U03200 In interoffice subaddress based bulletin board reception data was not stored in the box specified by the destination unit U03300 In polling reception from a unit of our make operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permit ID or telephone number Or in interoffice subaddress based bulletin board reception operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permit ID or telephone num ber U03400 Polling reception was interrupted because
148. e Gray1 patch for the original for adjustment Gray2 Setting the Gray2 patch for the original for adjustment Gray3 Setting the Gray3 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment Adjust Original Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions Select the item to be set Display Description Setting range Initial setting L Setting the L value 0 0 to 100 0 93 6 10 6 76 2 25 2 51 3 72 6 48 1 86 2 46 7 67 8 38 8 Setting the a value 200 0 to 200 0 0 9 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 3 32 8 69 9 18 6 54 2 51 3 25 3 Setting the b value 200 0 to 200 0 0 4 0 7 1 2 0 2 0 3 11 5 6 1 81 7 38 6 48 9 22 8 4 Enters the value that is indicated on the back of the chart using the cursor right left keys or numeric keys 5 Press the start key The value is set 1 3 45 2PV 2PW 3 Item No Description Setting Adjust Original This setting is usually unnecessary Display Description Setting range Initial setting Dist1 Sets the adjustment value of a leading 4 0 to 6 0 5 0 edge Dist2 Sets the adjustment value of a left edge 9 0 to 11 0 10 0 Dist3 Sets the adjustment v
149. e connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Toner motor K and engine PWB YC23 Defective drive transmission sys tem of the toner motor K Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective toner motor K Replace the toner motor K Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Toner motor C error When the toner motor C is driven the motor over current detection signal is detected continuously for 50 times 5 s at 100 ms intervals Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Toner motor C and engine PWB YC25 Defective drive transmission sys tem of the toner motor C Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective toner motor C Replace the toner motor C Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Toner motor M error When the toner motor M is driven the motor over current detection signal is detected continuously for 50 times 5 s
150. e of Contact the Service Administrative Division Machine number of main and EEPROM engine does not match 0600 Expanded memory DIMM Improper installa Check the installation of the expanded mem installing error tion expanded ory DIMM The expansion memory mod memory DIMM ules DIMM are not correctly mounted 0610 Expanded memory DIMM Defective Replace the expanded memory DIMM and error expanded memory check for correct operation see page 1 2 The expansion memory mod DIMM 12 ules DIMMjcmeunted on the Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor PB GOeSNOROPSIAIS rect operation see page 1 5 30 correctly 0830 FAX control PWB flash pro Defective FAX soft Install the fax software gram area checksum error ware Defective FAX con Replace the FAX control PWB see page 1 with the program of the FAX trol PWB 5 36 control PWB 0840 Faults of RTC The battery is dis Check visually and remedy if necessary The time is judged to go back connected from the based on the comparison of main PWB time and the current Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor ime Or live Yeats OF more PWB rect operation see page 1 5 30 have passed 0870 FAX control PWB to main Improper installa Reinstall the FAX control PWB see page 1 PWB high capacity data tion FAX control 5 36 transfer error PWB High capacity data transfer D
151. e page 1 5 27 Broken fuser heater wire Abnormally high fuser thermistor temperature Broken fuser thermistor wire Deformed connec tor pin If the I F connector pins of the fuser unit and the main unit are deformed owing to foreign matters such as paper dusts replace the connectors or the units including the con nectors Defective triac Remove the power cord and check that the resistance between terminals T1 and T2 of the triac TRA51 is of several Mega Ohms and not shorted see figure 1 4 4 If failed replace the power source PWB see page 1 5 29 1 4 22 51 Power source PWB Figure 1 4 4 Contents Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures Zero cross signal error The zero cross signal does not reach the engine PWB for more than 1 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Power source PWB YC103 and relay PWB YC1 Relay PWB YC4 and engine PWB Defective power source PWB or engine PWB Replace the power source PWB or the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 29 1 5 27 Toner motor K error When the toner motor K is driven the motor over current detection signal is detected continuously for 50 times 5 s at 100 ms intervals Defectiv
152. e personnel and a four digit error code indicating the type of the error Machine failure Call service Error occurred Turn the main power switch off and on CTHHHI Figure 1 4 3 1 4 6 2PV 2PW 2 Self diagnostic codes If the part causing the problem was not supplied use the unit including the part for replacement Contents Causes Check procedures corrective measures FAX control PWB system error Processing with the fax soft ware was disabled due toa hardware problem Defective FAX con trol PWB Replace the fax control PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 36 FAX control PWB incompat ible detection error Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility In the initial communication with the FAX control PWB any normal communication com mand is not transmitted Defective FAX soft ware Install the fax software Defective FAX con trol PWB Replace the fax control PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 36 Backup memory device error Defective flash memory Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 30 Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 30 MAC address data error For data in which the MAC address is invalid Defective flash memory Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 30 Defective eng
153. e registration sensor RS does not turn off dur ing paper feed from cassette Multiple sheets in cassette 2 PF feed sensor 1 PFFS1 does not turn off during paper feed from paper feeder 1 Multiple sheets in cassette 3 PF feed sensor 2 PFFS2 does not turn off during paper feed from paper feeder 2 Multiple sheets in duplex section The registration sensor RS does not turn off dur ing paper feed from duplex section Multiple sheets in MP tray MP paper conveying sensor MPPCS does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray Refer to figure 1 4 2 for paper jam location see page 1 4 2 1 4 3 Contents Conditions 2PV 2PW Jam location MP feed sensor remaining jam MP feed sensor MPFS is turned on when the power is turned on PF feed sensor 1 non arrival jam PF feed sensor 1 PFFS1 does not turn on during paper feed from paper feeder 2 PF feed sensor 1 stay jam PF feed sensor 1 PFFS1 does not turn off during paper feed from paper feeder 2 PF feed sensor 1 remaining jam PF feed sensor 1 PFFS1 is turned on when the power is turned on PF feed sensor 2 remaining jam PF feed sensor 2 PFFS2 is turned on when the power is turned on Registration sensor non arrival jam The registration sensor RS does not turn on dur ing paper feed from paper feeder 1 The registration sensor RS does not turn on dur ing paper feed from
154. e rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any 3 Defective motor Replace the ISU motor Defective PWB Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 30 9 Paper feed clutch does not operate Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Paper feed clutch and engine PWB YC3 Defective clutch Replace the paper feed clutch Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 27 10 MP feed clutch does not operate Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable MP feed clutch and engine PWB YC3 Defective clutch Replace the MP feed clutch Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 27 1 4 36 2PV 2PW Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 11 Registration clutch does not operate Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Registration clutch and engine PWB YC3
155. e start key 2 Select the item to set Display Description Timer Sleep Level Undisplayed setting of BAM conformity Timer change and Sleep Level Auto Sleep On Off setting of an Auto Sleep function Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select On or Off Display Description On On setting Off Off setting Initial setting On 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 37 2PV 2PW 2 Item No Description 0402 Adjust Print Margin Description Adjusts margins for image printing Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Press the system menu key 3 Press the start key to output a test pattern 4 Press the system menu key 5 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in Display Description range setting value per step Lead Printer leading edge margin 0 0 to 10 0 4 0 A Margin Printer left margin 0 0 to 10 0 4 0 C Margin Printer right margin 0 0 to 10 0 4 0 Trail Printer trailing edge margin 0 0 to 10 0 4 0 6 Change the setting value using the cursol left right keys or numeric keys Increasing the value makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower Printer leading edge margin 4 0 1 5 1 0 mm Printer _ lt Printer left margin righ
156. e when image failure occurs due to the drum This mode is effective when dew condensation on the drum occurs Method 1 Enter the Service Setting menu 2 Select Drum Refresh using the cursor up down keys 3 Press the start key 4 Press Yes the Left Select key Drum surface refreshing is performed Completion Press the stop key 1 3 93 Service items 2PV 2PW Description Altitude adjustment Setting altitude adjustment Description Sets the altitude adjustment mode Purpose Used when print quality deteriorates in an installation at the altitude of 1 500 meters or higher Method 1 Enter the Service Setting menu 2 Select Altitude Adj using the cursor up down keys 3 Press the start key 4 Select Normal High 1 or High 2 using the cursor up down keys 5 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key Main charger adjustment Setting main charger output Description Sets the main charger output This is executable only when the altitude adjustment mode is set to Normal Purpose Execute when the image density declines or an offset has occurred Method 1 Enter the Service Setting menu 2 Select MC using the cursor up down keys 3 Press the start key 4 Select 1 2 or 3 using the cursor up down keys 5 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key 1 3 94 2PV 2PW 1 Service items Description F
157. ed to DP pressure solenoid 24V2 PRESOLN RELSOLN 24V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DPPRSOL DPPRSOL On Press Off DPPRSOL On Release Off YC5 Connected to DP switch back sole noid 24V2 REVSOL 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DPSBSOL DPSBSOL On Off YC6 Connected to DP paper feed clutch 24V2 FEEDCL 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 2 3 24 24 V DC power to DPPFCL DPPFCL On Off 2PV 2PW Connector i Description 1 3 3V2 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power from MPWB Connectedto 2 GND Ground main PWB 0 3 3 V DC DPTS On Off 4 ORGSWN 0 3 3V DC DPOS On Off 5 OPSWN 0 3 3V DC DPOCS On Off 6 DPDETN O 0 3 3V DC DP set signal 7 RELSOLN 024V DC DPPRSOL On Release Off 8 PRESOLN 0 24V DC DPPRSOL On Press Off 9 REVSOL 0 24V DC DPSBSOL On Off 10 FEEDCL 0 24V DC DPPFCL On Off 2 3 25 2PV 2PW This page is intentionally left blank 2 3 26 2PV 2PW 3 2 4 1 Appendixes 1 Maintenance kits Maintenance part name Alternative Parts No part No Name used in service MK 592 Maintenance kit 200 000 pages Name used in parts list MK 592 MAINTENANCE KIT 1702KV7USO 072KV7US Developing unit K Developing unit M Developing unit C Developing unit Y Drum unit Intermediate transfer unit Fuser unit Retard roller unit Paper feed roller unit MP paper feed roller DV 560 US K
158. edge registration second page 4 BACK TAIL Trailing edge registration second page 5 ROTATE Leading edge registration rotate scan 2 1 1 Adjustable range 32 to 32 in 0 196mm increment 0 default 1 2 Adjustable range 32 to 32 in 0 196mm increment 0 default 1 3 Adjustable range 45 to 45 in 0 196mm increment 0 default 1 4 Adjustable range 45 to 45 in 0 196mm increment 0 default 1 5 Adjustable range 128 to 128 in 0 196mm increment 0 default Example FRONT HEAD set to 10 FRONT TAIL set to 15 BACK HEAD set to 10 BACK TAIL 15 IR 5 2 1 10 KCFG SCAN 2 2 15 KCFG SCAN 2 3 10 KCFG SCAN 2 4 15 EXIT Leading edge registration Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Trailing edge registration Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 2 4 15 2PV 2PW Adjusting the DP center line alternative command for the maintenance mode U072 Description Adjusts the scanning center line for the DP original Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the DP is used Format IR 5 3 1 2 EXIT Parameter 1 1 FRONT Center line first page 2 BACK Center line second page 3 ROTATE Center line rotated scan 2 Setting range 39 to 39 in 0 086mm increment initial 0 Exam
159. ee M page 1 5 45 Defective engine Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 27 PWB 4204 Laser output error yellow Defective connec Reinsert the connector Also check for conti The pin photo signal is not tor cable or poor nuity within the connector cable If none output from PD PWB Y for contact in the con replace the cable one second while laser is nector APC PWB Y and engine PWB YC32 emitted Defective APC Replace the laser scanner unit CY see PWB Y page 1 5 45 Defective PD PWB Replace the laser scanner unit CY see Y page 1 5 45 Defective engine Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 27 PWB 4600 150 cleaning motor error Defective connec Reinsert the connector Also check for conti When the LSU cleaning motor is driven the motor over cur rent detection signal is detected continuously for 50 times 5 s at 100 ms inter vals tor cable or poor contact in the con nector nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable LSU cleaning motor and engine PWB YC36 Defective drive transmission sys tem of the LSU cleaning motor Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective LSU cleaning motor Replace the LSU cleaning motor Defective engine PWB 1 4 19 Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Contents Causes 2PV 2
160. eed section DP forwarding pulley DP feed pulley LF holder PF stopper Front separation pad LF friction plate 7 DP separation pad 8 Upper guide 9 Switchback guide 10 DP original sensor DPOS 11 Actuator DP original sensor 12 Original table 2 1 25 ORGSWN FEEDCL DPMOT1A DPMOT2A DPMOT1B DPMOT2B YC32 16 3 YC32 15 YC32 14 J TE FEEDCL er ORGSWN Figure 2 1 27 Original feed section block diagram 2 1 26 2PV 2PW DPDPWB YC2 6 YC6 2 YC3 1 YC3 2 YC3 3 YC3 4 1 1 1 2 YC1 3 YC1 4 YC8 10 YC8 4 2PV 2PW 2 Original conveying section The original conveying section consists of the parts shown in figure A conveyed original is scanned by the optical section CCD of main machine when it passes through the DP contact glass of main machine SL KE Figure 2 1 28 Original conveying section 1 Conveying roller A 5 DP timing sensor DPTS 2 Conveying pulley 6 Actuator DP timing sensor 3 Conveying bottom 7 DP contact glass 4 Reading guide 2 1 27 FEEDCL TIMSWN DPMOT1A DPMOT2A DPMOT1B DPMOT2B YC32 16 YC32 15 YC32 14 MPWB YC32 13 YC32 1 YC32 8 MOTA1 _ MOTB1 MOTA2 2 _ FEEDCL TIMSWN Figure 2 1 29 Original conveying section block diagram 2 1
161. eerbusch Germany Phone 49 2159 9180 Fax 49 2159 918100 KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH Eduard Kittenberger Gasse 95 1230 Vienna Austria Phone 43 1 863380 Fax 43 1 86338 400 KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista Sweden Phone 46 8 546 550 00 Fax 46 8 546 550 10 KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf Postboks 150 Oppsal 0619 Oslo Norway Phone 47 22 62 73 00 Fax 47 22 62 72 00 KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A S Ejby Industrivej 60 DK 2600 Glostrup Denmark Phone 45 70223880 Fax 45 45765850 KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda Rua do Centro Cultural 41 Alvalade 1700 106 Lisboa Portugal Phone 351 21 843 6780 Fax 351 21 849 3312 KYOCERA Document Solutions South Africa Pty Ltd KYOCERA House Hertford Office Park 90 Bekker Road Cnr Allandale Midrand South Africa Phone 27 11 540 2600 Fax 27 11 466 3050 KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC Botanichesky pereulok 5 Moscow 129090 Russia Phone 7 495 741 0004 Fax 7 495 741 0018 KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East Dubai Internet City Bldg 17 Office 157 P O Box 500817 Dubai United Arab Emirates Phone 971 04 433 0412 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc 2 28 1 chome Tamatsukuri Chuo ku Osaka 540 8585 Japan Phone 81 6 6764 3555 http www kyoceradocumentsolutions com
162. efective FAX con Replace the FAX control PWB or main PWB baleen me FAX control PWB fol PWB or main and check for correct operation see page 1 and the main PWB of the PWB 5 36 or 1 5 30 machine was not normally performed even if the data transfer was retried the speci fied times 0920 Fax file system error Defective FAX con Replace the FAX control PWB and check for The backup data is not retained for file system abnor mality of flash memory of the FAX control PWB trol PWB 1 4 8 correct operation see page 1 5 36 2PV 2PW Check procedures Code Contents Causes corrective measures 0930 EEPROM bus error Defective drum Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 21 PWB EEPROM Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor PWB EEPROM operation see page 1 5 27 Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation see page 1 5 27 Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation see page 1 5 30 1010 Lift motor error Defective bottom Check to see if the bottom plate can move When the lift motor is driven plate elevation smoothly and repair it if any problem is the motor over current detec mechanism in the found tion signal is detected continu cassette ously for 50 times 5 s at 100 Defective connec Reinsert the connector Also check for conti intervals mu tor cable
163. en remove the left fan motor Turn the cam inside the device to the position indicated Remove three screws and then remove MP feed drive unit Check or replace the MP feed drive unit and refit all the removed parts 1 5 37 Figure 1 5 56 drive unit 2PV 2PW 2PV 2PW 2 Detaching and refitting the drum developing drive unit Procedure 1 6 Remove drum units Y and developing units K M C Y see page 1 5 21 19 Remove the rear upper cover right upper cover left upper cover and front cover see page 1 5 3 Remove the left rear cover left cover and left lower cover see page 1 5 9 Remove the engine PWB see page 1 5 27 Remove the screw and release the hook and then remove the developing fan unit Remove the screw and then remove the ID guide Developing fan unit Developing fan unit Figure 1 5 57 Figure 1 5 58 2PV 2PW 7 Remove five screws and then remove drum developing drive unit 8 Check or replace the drum developing drive unit and refit all the removed parts Screw Drum Developing drive unit Figure 1 5 59 1 5 39 2PV 2PW 3 Detaching and refitting the paper feed drive unit Procedure 1 Remove the rear upper cover right upper cover left upper cover and front cover see page 1 5 3 2 Remove the left re
164. ensor Defective ISU motor Replace the ISU motor Defective CCD PWB Replace the scanner unit see page 1 5 48 Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 30 Exposure lamp error The exposure lamp does not turn on when power is on The lamp s luminosity does not stabilize in one minute after power is on Error is detected while pro cessing lamp feedback in standby Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Exposure lamp and inverter PWB CN2 Inverter PWB CN1 and CCD PWB YC3 CCD PWB YC1 and main PWB YC8 Defective exposure lamp Replace the scanner unit see page 1 5 48 Defective inverter PWB or CCD PWB Replace the scanner unit see page 1 5 48 Defective main PWB 1 4 17 Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 30 Contents Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures Communication error between scanner and ASIC An error code is detected Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable CCD PWB YC1 and main PWB YC8 Defective CCD PWB Replace the scanner unit see page 1 5 48
165. ensor error scanning direction Engine other error 003 Original deviation in the auxil Controller error lary scanning direction Adjustment value error 5004 Original inclination error Adjustment value error 5005 Original type error Controller other error SFFF Scanner other error Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed 1 3 41 2PV 2PW 3 Item No Description Auto Adj Scn Description Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections Scanner section Original size magnification leading edge timing center line input gamma input gamma in monochrome mode and matrix DP scanning section Original size magnification leading edge timing center line Purpose To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item The screen for executing is displayed Original to be used for adjustment P N Table Automatic adjustment in the scanner sec 302NM94340 tion Display Description Original size magnification leading edge timing center line input gamma input gamma in monochrome mode and matrix Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning 302NM94330 section Original size magnification leading edge timing center line Performs automatic adjustment the 30
166. er Y1 Value in units of 5 seconds 1 to 99 6 30 s Error message for device error Y3 0 Not detect 33 Detect 33 Duplex operation for specified paper type Prepunched Preprintedand Let terhead Y4 0 Off 1 On 2 4 7 2PV 2PW Item FRPO Setting values Factory setting Default operation for PDF direct printing Y5 Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper size Loads paper from the current paper cassette Through the image Loads paper which is the same size as the image Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper size Loads Letter A4 size paper depending on the image size Through the image Loads Letter A4 size paper depending on the image size Through the image Loads paper from the current paper cassette Through the image Loads Letter A4 size paper depending on the image size 10 Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper size Loads Letter A4 size paper depending on the imagesize 0 e MPS error Y6 Does not print the error report and display the error message Prints the error report Displays the error message Prints the error report and displays the error message Ignored in some emulation modes 2 4 8 2PV 2PW 4 Maintenance Commands This section provides information on how to use the maintenance command and its parameters using
167. er 9 MPF tray 10 MP paper sensor MPPS 11 Actuator MP paper sensor MPSOL LAS x MPSOLDRN MPFPAP _ FEMOTRDYN FEMOTCLK FEMOTREN Figure 2 1 4 MP tray paper feed section block diagram 2 1 4 2PV 2PW YC4 2 YC16 3 EPWB YC3 6 YC3 7 YC3 8 3 Paper conveying section 2PV 2PW The paper conveying section conveys paper to the transfer separation section as paper feeding from the cas sette or MP tray or as paper refeeding for duplex printing Paper by feeding is conveyed by the middle roller to the position where the registration sensor RS is turned on and then sent to the transfer separation section by the front registration roller and rear registration roller Figure 2 1 5 Paper conveying section MPF feed rollers Feed pulleys MPF feed upper guide MPF feed lower guide Middle roller Middle pulley Front registration roller NO 2 1 5 8 Rear registration roller 9 MP paper conveying sensor MPPCS 10 Actuator MP paper conveying sensor 11 Registration sensor RS 12 Actuator registration sensor 2PV 2PW EPWB pod YC18 3 REGPAP YC3 13 REGCLDRN YC3 11 MIDCLDRN
168. er heater FH is forced to turn off Figure 2 1 20 Fuser section 1 Heat roller 6 Eject roller 2 Press roller 7 Eject pulley 3 Upper fuser frame 8 Fuser heater FH 4 Fuser paper guide 9 Fuser thermistor FTH 5 Separators 10 Fuser thermostat FTS 2 1 19 EPWB YC19 1 YC19 3 YC15 3 YC15 2 YC15 1 YC9 5 YC9 3 2PV 2PW EJPWB Fuser unit 2545 PDIRN FTHERM vci 4 2 FTHERM IMAMOTREN i IMAMOTCLK REL LIMAMOTRDYN 2 EVSW 28 1 gt Ko gt 2 y N N RYPWB O gt gt HEATRE1 4 YC1 13 L YC103 13 PSPWB LZCROSS 2 46 1 11 YC103 11 Figure 2 1 21 Fuser section block diagram 2 1 20 2 1 7 Eject Feedshift section 2PV 2PW The paper eject feedshift section consists of the conveying path which sends the paper that has passed the fuser section to the inner tray or the duplex conveying section Figure 2 1 22 Eject Feed shift section 1 Eject roller 2 Eject pulley 3 Eject roller 4 Eject pulley 5 Upper eject guide 2 1 21 6 Change guide 7 Eject sensor ES 8 Actuator eject sensor 9 Actuator eject sensor 2PV 2PW FUSPAP vers STDUA J
169. er roller unit 3 Check or replace the transfer roller unit and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 36 1 5 25 2PV 2PW 1 5 7 Fuser section 1 Detaching and refitting the fuser unit Procedure 1 Open the paper conveying unit 2 Remove the IF cover see page 1 5 3 3 Remove the screw and then fuser wire cover Fuser wire cover 4 Remove three connectors 5 Remove two screws and then remove the fuser unit 6 Check or replace the fuser unit and refit all the removed parts Take care not to get the cables caught Figure 1 5 38 1 5 26 2PV 2PW 1 5 8 PWBs 1 Detaching and refitting the engine PWB Procedure 5 SEE 1 Remove the left cover see page 1 5 9 55 A EN 2 Remove all connectors from the engine i od PWB yee SI YC19 YC YC37 38 YC24 YC15 25 YC40 YC30 YC28 J ve4 YC32 1 YC12 YC20 YC34 YC33 YC17 29 Engine PWB Figure 1 5 39 1 5 27 Remove three screws and then remove the engine PWB Check or replace the engine PWB and refit all the removed parts To replace the engine PWB remove the EEPROM U1 from the old engine PWB and mount it to the new engine PWB EEPROM U1 1 5 28 Figure 1 5 40 2PV 2PW 2PV 2PW 1 2
170. eration is canceled and an error code is displayed 10 When normally completed Fin is displayed 11 Turn the main power switch off and on after completing writing when selecting Import Error Codes Codes Description e0000 e0001 e0002 e0003 e0004 e0100 to eO1ff 0200 to eO2ff e0300 to eO3ff e0400 to eO4ff 0500 to eO5ff e0600 to eO6ff e0700 to e07ff e0800 to eO8ff 0900 to eO9ff e0a00 to eOaff e0b00 to eObff 0 00 to eOcff e0d00 to eOdff e0e00 to eOeff e1000 to e1fff e2000 to e2fff e3000 to e3fff e4000 to e4fff e5000 to e5fff Unspecified error Parameter error Dummy file creation error XML file for Import is not found Exported file is not found Address book processing error One touch processing error User managements processing error Panel program processing error FAX transmission processing error System setting processing error Network processing error Job accounting processing error Short cut processing error Job processing error FAX processing error Printer processing error Panel processing error Document box processing error Device processing error SOAP IF processing error KM WSDL IF processing error import preparation error e4002 Import file is not found e4008 File header information error SOAP data rewriting processing error 1 3 77 2PV 2PW Item No Description U917 Supplement The following restrictions apply to the data whic
171. esponse after transmission of a CNS signal between units of our make U01129 No response after transmission of an SPA signal short protocol U01141 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DTC signal U01143 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an FTT signal U01155 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an SPA signal short protocol U01160 During message reception transmission time exceeded the maximum transmission time per line U01162 Reception was aborted due to a modem malfunction during message reception U01191 Communication was interrupted because an error occurred during an image data recep tion sequence in the V 34 mode U01193 There was no response or a DCN signal or invalid command was received during phase C D of reception U01194 A DCN signal was received during phase B of reception U01195 No message was received during phase C of reception U01196 Error line control was exceeded and a decoding error occurred for the message being received 1 4 52 2PV 2PW 2 7 U017XX error code table V 34 transmission Error code Description U01700 A communication error occurred in phase 2 line probing U01720 A communication error occurred in phase 4 modem parameter exchange U01721 Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed between units U01700 A comm
172. etting using the cursor left right keys Description Setting range Initial setting Redialing interval 1 to 9 min 3 120 V 2 220 240 V 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting the number of times of auto redialing 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys Description Setting range Initial setting Number of redialing 0 to 15 2 120 Vy3 220 240 V 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 56 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U630 Setting communication control 1 Description Makes settings for fax transmission regarding the communication Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set using the cursor up down keys Display Description TX Speed Sets the communication starting speed RX Speed Sets the reception speed TX Echo Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender RX Echo Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiver Setting the communication starting speed Sets the initial communication speed when starting transmission When the destination unit has V 34 capability V 34 is selected for transmission regardless of this setting 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description 14400bps V17 V 17 14400 bps 9600bps V29 V
173. g label Inside Figure 1 5 151 1 5 93 2PV 2PW This page is intentionally left blank 1 5 94 2PV 2PW 3 1 6 1 Upgrading the firmware Follow the procedure below to upgrade the firmware of main PWB main controller and scanner engine PWB FAX control PWB optional language optional paper feeder and color table Preparation Extract the file that has the download firmware and put them in the USB Memory Procedure 1 Turn ON the main power switch and confirm if the screen shows Ready to rer copy then turn OFF the main power uz Switch 2 Insert USB memory that has the firm ware in the USB memory slot 3 Turn ON the main power switch 4 About 40 seconds later FW Update will be displayed and blinking the memory indicator this shows to start USB memory the download 5 Display the software that now upgrad ing 7 p USB memory slot FW Update CTRL FW Update ENGN FW Update PF1 FW Update PF 2 FW Update SCAN FW Update FAX FW Update OPT FW Update ES Caution Never turn off the power switch or remove the USB flash device during upgrading 6 Display the completion of the upgrade Memory indicator is ON condition Figure 1 6 1 7 ROM version is confirmed by the con tent of the display 8 Turn OFF the main power switch and remove the USB memory 4 in 1 model with FAX only Safe UPDATE If the
174. g menu 2 Select Test Page using the cursor up down keys 3 Press the start key 4 Press Yes the Left Select key Test page will be printed 16 256 Density 2 24 256 32 256 Magenta 1 Yellow 1 Since focusing in yellow is hardly readable yellow is mixed with cyan for more readability resulting in green 2 Each portion of colors has three different magnitude of halftones bands If focus is excessively lost dots are not recognizable with the 16 256 band resulting in uneven density It also results in vertical streaks in the 24 256 and or 32 256 bands Figure 1 3 20 Completion Press the stop key 1 3 90 Service items 2PV 2PW Description Developer Setting Entering initial value for replacing the developing unit Description After replacing the developing unit enter the initial value 6 digit data assigned on a label attached to the package or developing unit Purpose To set the initial value after replacing the developing unit Method 1 Enter the Service Setting menu 2 Select DeveloperSetting using the cursor up down keys 3 Press the start key Enter the initial value 6 digit data using the numeric keys 4 Press the start key The initial value is set ee Developing unit Package Figure 1 3 21 Completion Press the stop key 1 3 91 Service items 2PV 2PW Description Developer Refresh Performing devel
175. g the G3 transmission cable equalizer OdB Setting the G3 reception cable equalizer OdB Setting the modem detection level 43dBm 0651 Setting modem 2 Modem output level 9 120 V 10 220 240 V DTMF output level main value 5 120 V 10 5 220 240 V DTMF output level level difference 2 120 V 2 5 220 240 V 0660 Setting the NCU Setting the connection to PBX PSTN PSTN Setting PSTN dial tone detection On Setting busy tone detection On Setting for a PBX Loop Setting the loop current detection before dialing On U670 Outputting lists U695 FAX function customize On Off U699 Setting the software switches 1 3 4 Section Content of maintenance item 2PV 2PW Initial setting Others Clearing the print coverage data Setting backup data reading writing Checking the copy counts Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts one time only Checking machine life counts Data capture mode Memory data Individual setting 1 3 5 2PV 2PW 3 Contents of the maintenance mode items Item No Description U000 Outputting an own status report Description Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items and paper jam and service call occurrences Outputs the event log Also sends output data to the USB memory Purpose To check the current setting of the maintenance items or paper jam or service call occurrences Before initializing
176. ge 2 5 1 5 2 0 mm 2 5 1 5 2 0 mm Trailing edge margin of the copy image 4 0 mm or less Figure 1 3 13 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the margins perform the following maintenance modes 0034 0402 P 1 3 17 P 1 3 38 583 Completion Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears 1 3 39 Item No 2PV 2PW 2 Description U404 Adjust Scanning Margin DP Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Press the system menu key 3 Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy 4 Press the system menu key 5 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step A Margin DP left margin 0 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 5 mm B Margin DP leading edge margin 0 0 to 10 0 2 5 0 5 mm C Margin DP right margin 0 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 5 mm D Margin DP trailing edge margin 0 0 to 10 0 4 0 0 5 mm Display Description 6 Change the setting value using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys Increasing the value makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower DP leading edge margin 4 0 1 5 1 0 mm DP left margin gt lt DP right margin 2 5 1 5 2 0 mm 2 5 1 5
177. ge in Display Description range setting value per step Front Head Leading edge registration of 32 to 32 0 0 196 mm CCD first side Front Tail Trailing edge registration of 32 to 32 0 196 mm CCD first side Back Head Leading edge registration of 45 to 45 0 196 mm CCD second side Back Tail Trailing edge registration of 45 to 45 0 196 mm CCD second side Rotate Leading edge registration 128 to 127 0 196 mm rotate copying 1 3 25 Item No 2PV 2PW Description 0071 Adjustment Leading edge registration 1 Change the setting value using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Increasing the value moves the image forward and decreasing the value moves the image Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 9 2 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the first side is adjusted check the second side and if adjustment is required carry out the adjustment If the above adjustment does not optimize the leading edge registration proceed with the follow ing maintenance modes U034 P 1 3 17 HOT Adjustment Trailing edge registration 1 Change the setting value using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2
178. h were imported from 4 in 1 models with FAX to 3 in 1 models without FAX Personal address book FAX related data are not imported Group address book Group addresses including FAX addresses are not imported Job accounting data Initial values are added for FAX related data One touch data Groups assigned with FAX addresses or those including FAX are not imported User management data Initial values are added for out going FAXes of authentication Program data Not imported The same applies when data are imported from 3 in 1 to 4 in 1 models Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U920 Checking the copy counts Description Checks the copy counts Purpose To check the copy counts Method 1 Press the start key The current counts are displayed Display Description Color Copy H Count value of color copy Coverage High Color Copy M Count value of color copy Coverage Middle Color Copy L Count value of color copy Coverage Low B W Copy Count value of black white copy Color Prn H Count value of color print Coverage High Color Prn M Count value of color print Coverage Middle Color Prn L Count value of color print Coverage Low B W Prn Count value of black white print B W Fax Count value of black white FAX Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 78 2PV 2PW Item No Descripti
179. haft DP feed pulley unit LF holder Figure 1 5 139 1 5 84 14 15 16 17 Remove the PF stopper from the LF holder Remove the stop ring Pull out the LF shaft and then remove the LF gear 18 joint gear and DP for warding pulley Check or replace the DP feed pulley and DP forwarding pulley and refit all the removed parts 1 5 85 2PV 2PW LF holder J 6 DP forwarding 9 pulley Joint gear LF gear 18 Figure 1 5 140 2PV 2PW 3 Detaching and refitting the DP separation pad Procedure 1 Remove the DP paper feed pulley unit see page 1 5 82 2 Remove the DP separation pad 3 Check or replace the DP separation pad and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 141 1 5 86 2PV 2PW 4 Detaching and refitting the DP drive PWB Procedure 1 Remove the DP rear cover see page 1 5 82 Remove all connectors from DP drive PWB Remove the screw and then remove the DP drive PWB 4 Check or replace the DP drive PWB and refit all the removed parts E 6 4 Figure 1 5 142 1 5 87 2PV 2PW 1 5 12 Others 1 Detaching and refitting the paper conveying unit Procedure 1 Open the rear cover 2 Remove left and right straps Rear cover 3 Remove the rear cover unit Figure 1 5 144 1 5 88 2PV 2PW 4 Remove the paper conveying unit
180. hange 0 OFF 1 ON Color printing double count mode 0 All single counts 3 Folio Single count Less than 330 mm length Black and white printing double count mode 0 All single counts 3 Folio Single count Less than 330 mm length Billing counting timing Temperature machine inside Temperature machine outside Relative humidity machine outside Absolute humidity machine outside Fixed assets number Job end judgment time out time Job end detection mode Prescribe environment reset 0 OFF 1 ON Media type attributes 1 to 28 Not used 18 19 20 For details on settings refer to MDAT command in Prescribe Commands Reference Manual Weight settings 0 Light 1 Normal 1 2 Normal 2 3 Normal 3 4 Heavy 1 5 6 7 Fuser settings 0 High 1 Middle 2 Low 3 Vellum Duplex settings 0 Disable 1 Enable Heavy 2 Heavy 3 Extra Heavy Calibration information Black Cyan Magenta Yellow 1 3 87 Service items 2PV 2PW 3 Description Description Supplement RFID information RFID reader writer version infor mation Soft version of the optional paper feeder Paper feeder 1 Paper feeder 2 Version of the optional message Color table version for printer Color table 2 version for printer Maintenance information Altitude 0 Standard 1 High altitude 1 2 High alti
181. he engine PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation see page 1 5 27 7414 Drum unit Y non installing Installation of Install drum unit Y compatible with the spec error incompatible drum ifications to the machine The EEPROM of drum PWB Y unit Y doce not communicate nor Defective connec Reinsert the connector Also check for conti mally tor cable or poor nuity within the connector cable If none contact in the con replace the cable nector Drum unit Y and Drum relay PWB YC5 Drum relay PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC34 Defective drum Replace the drum unit Y see page 1 5 21 PWB Y Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation see page 1 5 27 9500 Contact the Service Administrative Division 9510 9520 9530 Backup data error Replacing both the Check that the machine operates properly The serial number of the machine written on the EEPROM of the engine PWB differs with that is written on both the flash memory of the engine PWB and the EEPROM of the drum PWB as a backup engine PWB and the drum unit at the same time 1 4 26 by reverting the engine controller and the drum unit to the old ones To replace the engine PWB and the drum unit at the same time turn on the machine after replacing either one Check that the machine operates properly and then turn off the machine Replace the other and turn on the machine to check that the machine operates properly Be su
182. he screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting communication control 5 Description Sets the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal Used as a measure to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys Description Setting range Initial setting Number of allowed error bytes when detecting 0 to 255 0 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 62 2PV 2PW Item No Description 0640 Setting communication time 1 Description Sets the detection time when one shot detection is selected for remote switching This setting item will be displayed but the setting made is ineffective Sets the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching This setting item will be displayed but the setting made is ineffective Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set using the cursor up down keys Display Description Time One Sets the one shot detection time for remote switching Time Cont Sets the continuous detection time for remote switching Setting the one shot detection time for remote switching 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys
183. he secondary paper feed start timing 7 MP paper sensor 5 Detects the presence of paper on the MP tray 8 MP paper conveying sensor MPFS Detects a paper misfeed in the MP paper conveying section 9 Eject sensor Detects a paper misfeed in the fuser or eject section 10 Home position sensor HPS Detects the ISU in the home position 11 Toner sensor TS K Detects the toner density in the developing unit 12 Toner sensor TS M Detects the toner density in the developing unit M 13 Toner sensor 5 Detects the toner density in the developing unit C 14 Toner sensor 5 Detects the toner density in the developing unit Y 15 ID sensor 1 IDS1 Measures image density for color calibration 16 ID sensor 2 1052 Measures image density for color calibration 2 2 4 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2PV 2PW Developing release switch DEVRSW Detects separation of developing units C and Y Waste toner sensor WTS Detects when the waste toner box is full Envelope switch EVSW Detects the envelope mode setting Inner tray switch ITSW Detects the opening and closing of the inner tray Toner container sensor
184. he test copy originals 2 1 1 Adjustable range 33 to 33 in 0 086mm increment 0 default 1 2 Adjustable range 0 to 3 in 0 22mm increment 0 default Example DP READ set to 15 BLACK LINE set to 3 IR KCFG 5 9 1 15 KCFG SCAN 9 2 3 EXIT 2 4 13 2PV 2PW Adjusting the DP magnification alternative command for the maintenance mode U070 Description Adjusts the DP original scanning speed Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used Format IR KCFG SCAN 4 1 2 EXIT Parameter 1 2 CONVEYING SPEED Magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction 2 Adjustable range 25 to 25 in 0 1 increment 0 default Example DP scanning magnification set to 20 to increase 2 IR KCFG SCAN 4 2 20 EXIT Leading edge registration Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 2 4 14 2PV 2PW Adjusting the DP scanning timing alternative command for the maintenance mode U071 Description Adjusts the DP original scanning timing Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image when the DP is used Format IR KCFG SCAN 2 1 2 EXIT Parameter 1 1 FRONT HEAD Leading edge registration first page 2 FRONT TAIL Trailing edge registration first page 3 BACK HEAD Leading
185. heck for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Duplex motor and engine PWB YC37 Defective drive trans mission system Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any 3 Defective motor Replace the duplex motor Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 27 3 Right fan motor does not operate Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Right fan motor and main PWB YC42 Defective motor Replace the right fan motor Defective PWB Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 30 4 Left fan motor does not operate Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Left fan motor and engine PWB YC29 Defective motor Replace the left fan motor Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 27 1 4 35 Problem Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures 5 Controller fan motor does not operate Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the con
186. hen low speed setting is active FIF length in transmission of more than 4 times of DIS DTC signal 1 3 73 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U699 lt Communication time setting gt No Bit Item 53 76543210 T3 timeout setting 54 76543210 T4 timeout setting automatic equipment 55 76543210 T5 timeout setting 60 76543210 Time before transmission of CNG 1100 Hz signal 63 76543210 TO timeout setting manual equipment 64 7 Phase C timeout in ECM reception 66 76543210 Timeout 1 in countermeasures against echo 68 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V 8 Modem setting No Bit Item 89 76543 RX gain adjust NCU setti ng No Bit Item 121 7654 Dial tone busy tone detection pattern 122 7654 Busy tone detection pattern 1 Busy tone detection in automatic FAX TEL switching 125 76543210 Access code registration for connection to PSTN 126 7654 FAX TEL automatic switching ringback tone ON OFF cycle Calling time setting No Bit Item 133 76543210 DTMF signal transmission time 134 76543210 DTMF signal pause time 141 76543210 Ringer detection cycle minimum 142 76543210 Ringer detection cycle maximum 143 76543210 Ringer
187. herwise it is a counterfeit See through the left window See through the right window e marking 9 Validation viewer Validation viewer Ma RDULCRO om protection d seal protection seal A black colored band when A shiny or gold colored band when seen through the left side window seen through the right side window Figure 1 5 1 The brand protection seal has an incision as shown below to prohibit reuse Incision Cut a NJULCIG m 0 ORKYOCE Figure 1 5 2 1 5 2 2PV 2PW 1 5 2 Outer covers 1 Detaching and refitting the rear upper cover right upper cover left upper cover and front cover Procedure 1 Open the paper conveying unit 2 Release the hook and then remove the IF cover IF cover Paper conveying unit 3 Remove two screws and then remove the rear upper cover Figure 1 5 4 1 5 3 2PV 2PW 4 Pull the inner tray lever and open the inner tray 5 Release two hooks Slide the right Inner tray upper cover backward and then remove it Ui y 2 NS a gt Figure 1 5 5 i 2 S o x o o c 8 E S gt E c c E lt 5 gt 5 o NN Figure 1 5 6 1 5 4 2PV 2PW 7 Release five h
188. hows the message requesting toner replenishment replace the container Insufficient agitation of toner container Shake the toner container vertically approxi mately 10 times Paper damp Check the paper storage conditions replace the paper 1 4 30 2PV 2PW 6 The background is colored Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Defective color calibration Perform the color calibration Refer to opera tion guide Defective Defective developing unit Replace the developing unit for the color that developing causes an error see page 1 5 19 bias output Defective high voltage Replace the high voltage PWB PWB see page 1 5 35 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 27 Defective Defective drum unit Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 21 drum sur Detective high voltage Replace the high voltage PWB face charg pwp see page 1 5 35 ing Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 27 7 White streaks are printed vertically Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Foreign object in one of the Replace the developing unit for the color that causes an developing units error see page 1 5 19 Adhesion of soiling to transfer Clean the transfer belt Replace the intermediate transfer belt unit if it is extremely dirty see page 1 5 22 Adhesion of soi
189. ic charge on the drum black Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum magenta 6 Cleaning lamp CL K 7 Cleaning lamp M CL M Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum cyan 8 Cleaning lamp C CL C Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum yellow Heats the heat roller Y 9 Cleaning lamp Y CL 10 Fuser heater FH Prevents overheating of the heat roller 11 Fuser thermal cutout 2 2 8 2PV 2PW 5 Document processor Machine right 22 Machine inside Machine left Figure 2 2 5 Document processor 1 DP drive PWB DPDPWB Consists the solenoids and clutch driver circuit and wiring relay circuit 2 DP original sensor DPOS Detects the presence of an original 3 DP timing sensor DPTS Detects the original scanning timing 4 DP open close sensor DPOCS Detects the opening closing of the DP 5 DP paper feed motor Drives the original feed section 6 DP paper feed clutch DPPFCL Controls the drive of the DP forwarding pulley and DP feed pulley 7 DP switchback solenoid DPSBSOL Operates the switchback guide 8 DP pressure solenoid DPPRSOL Operates the switchback pulley 2 2 9 2PV 2PW This page is inte
190. ics error 6000 has hap pened four times Indicates the log coun ter depending on the maintenance item for maintenance T Toner container 00 Black 01 Cyan 02 Magenta 03 Yellow M Maintenance kit 01 MK 590 592 594 26 28 ppm model only Example TOO 1 The toner container has been replaced once The toner replace ment log is triggered by toner empty This record may con tain such a reference as the toner container is inserted twice or a used toner container is inserted Item No 2PV 2PW Description U001 Exit Maintenance Mode Description Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode Purpose To exit the maintenance mode Method 1 Press the start key The normal copy mode is entered Setting the factory default data Description Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings Purpose To move the image scanner unit to the home position Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Mode1 All using the cursor up down keys 3 Press the start key The imege scanner unit returns to the home position 4 Turn the main power switch off and on An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error When errors occurred turn main power switch off then on and execute initialization using maintenance item U002 Error codes Codes Description 0001 Controller error 0020 Engine error 0040 Scanner error
191. il Sets how trailing edge margins are detected Selecting if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performed Sets whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing it in the auxiliary direction or at 100 magnification 1 Select the setting using the cursor left right keys Display Description On Auto reduction is performed if the received document is longer than the fax paper Off Auto reduction is not performed Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting the automatic printing of the protocol list Sets if the protocol list is automatically printed out 1 Select the setting using the cursor left right keys Display Description On The protocol list is automatically printed out after communica tion The protocol list is automatically printed out after communica tion only if a communication error occurs Off The protocol list is not printed out automatically Initial setting Off 2 Press the start key The setting is set 1 3 54 Item No 2PV 2PW Description 0612 Setting how trailing edge margins are detected This determines whether trailing edge margin is detected to prevent image from being mutilated while printing a received Fax 1 Select On or Off using the cursor left right keys Display Description On Detects trailing edge margin Off Does not detect trailing edge marg
192. in Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the remote switching mode Description Sets the signal detection method for remote switching Be sure to change the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the machine Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select Remort Mode and press the start key 3 Select the mode using the cursor up down keys Display Description One One shot detection Cont Continuous detection Initial setting One 4 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 55 2PV 2PW Item No Description 0625 Setting the transmission system 1 Description Makes settings for the auto redialing interval and the number of times of auto redialing Purpose Change the setting to prevent the following problems fax transmission is not possible due to too short redial interval or fax transmission takes too much time to complete due to too long redial interval Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set using the cursor up down keys Display Description Interval Setting the auto redialing interval Times Setting the number of times of auto redialing Setting the auto redialing interval 1 Change the s
193. ine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Backup memory read write error main PWB Defective flash memory Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 30 Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 30 Backup memory data error main PWB Defective flash memory Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 30 Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 30 Engine PWB EEPROM error Detecting engine PWB EEPROM communication error Improper installa tion engine PWB EEPROM Check the installation of the EEPROM and remedy if necessary Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Device damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Billing counting error A checksum error is detected in the main and engine backup memories for the bill ing counters Data damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Defective PWB 1 4 7 Replace the main PWB or the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 30 1 5 27 2PV 2PW Check procedures Code Contents Causes corrective measures 0180 Machine number mismatch Data damag
194. ion Press the stop key 1 3 82 Service items Description 2PV 2PW 3 Service status page 1 Service Status Page MFP 1 Firmware version 2PW_2000 000 000 2013 07 24 2 2013 07 24 15 15 3 4 Controller Infor Memory status 7 Standard Size 8 Option Slot 9 Total Size Time 10 Local Time Zone 11 Date and Time 12 Time Server Installed Options 13 Paper Feeder2 14 Paper Feeders 15 Memory Card 16 SSD 17 Card Authentication Kit B 18 UG 33 19 USB Keyboard 20 USB Keyboard Type Print Coverage 21 Average 6 22 Total K 1 10 C 2 20 M 3 30 Y 4 40 23 Copy K 1 10 C 2 20 M 3 30 Y 4 40 24 Printer K 1 10 C 2 20 M 3 30 Y 4 40 25 FAX K 1 10 26 Period 27 Last Page K C M Y mation FAX Information 28 Rings Normal 29 Rings FAX TEL 30 Rings TAD 128 0 KB 128 0 KB 2 0 GB 31 FRPO Status User Top Margin User Left Margin 01 00 Tokio 06 04 2010 12 00 10 183 53 13 A1 A2 100 A3 A4 100 Installed Installed Installed Not Installed Installed Not Installed Connected US English PDF mode Usage Page A4 Letter Conversion RP Code 32 1234 5678 9012 33 5678 9012 3456 34 9012 3456 7890 35 3456 7890 1234 1111111 11 2222222 22 3333333 33 4444444 44 1111111 11 2222222 22 3333333 33 4444444 44 1111111 11 2222222 22 3333333 33 4444444
195. ion sensor MP paper conveying sensor or eject sensor Check visually and remove it if any Defective registration sensor Replace the registration sensor Defective MP paper conveying sensor Replace the MP paper conveying sensor Defective eject sen sor Replace the eject PWB 18 A message indicat ing cover open is displayed when the inner tray or rear cover is closed Deformed actuator of the interlock switch Check visually and replace if necessary Defective interlock switch Replace the interlock switch 19 DP paper feed motor does not operate Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DP paper feed motor and DP drive PWB YC3 DP drive PWB YC1 and main PWB YC32 Defective drive trans mission system Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any 3 Defective motor Replace the DP paper feed motor Defective PWB Replace the DP drive PWB or main PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 87 1 5 30 20 DP paper feed clutch does not operate Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable
196. ion language PRESCRIBE 2PV 2PW Scanner Specifications Windows XP 32bit 64bit Windows Vista 32bit 64bit Windows 7 32bit 64bit Windows 8 32bit 64bit Windows Server 2003 32bit 64bit Windows Server 2008 32bit 64bit Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 IBM PC AT compatible CPU Celeron 600 MHz or higher System requirements RAM 128 MB or more HDD free space 20 MB or more Interface Ethernet Resolution 600 dpi 400 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 200x400dpi 200 100 File format JPEG TIFF PDF XPS PDF A High compression PDF B W 35 images min Simplex Color 25 images min Scanning A4 landscape 300 dpi Image quality Text Photo original speed B W 21 images min Duplex Color 15 images min A4 landscape 300 dpi Image quality Text Photo original Interface Network interface 1 1OBASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T Network protocol TCP IP Operating system PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB FTP Scan to FTP FTP over SSL Transmission system E mail transmission SNTP Scan to E mail TWAIN 1 WIA scan 1 Available operating system Windows XP Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 Windows Server 2012 Windows 8 2 Available operating system Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 Windows Server 2012 Windows 8 2PV 2PW FAX 4 in 1 model with FAX only Item Specifications Compatibility G3 Communication line
197. ion of an RR signal ECM U01080 A PIP signal was received after transmission of a PPS NULL signal U01092 During transmission in V 34 mode communication was interrupted because of an impos sible combination of the symbol speed and communication speed U01093 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during phase B of transmission U01094 The preset number of command retransfers for DCS NSS signals was exceeded during phase B of transmission U01095 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS Q signal during phase D of transmission and the preset number of command transfers was exceeded U01096 A DCN signal or invalid command was received during phase D of transmission U01097 The preset number of command retransfers was exceeded after transmission of an RR signal or no response 1 4 51 2PV 2PW 2 6 U011XX error code table G3 reception Error code Description U01100 Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DCS signal U01101 Function of the unit excl communication mode select differs from that indicated by an NSS signal U01102 A DTC NSC signal was received when no transmission data was in the unit U01110 No response after transmission of a DIS signal U01111 No response after transmission of a DTC NSC signal U01113 No response after transmission of an FTT signal U01125 No r
198. ission or restricted transmission was interrupted because the permit ID s did not agree with U05200 Password check reception or restricted reception was interrupted because the permit ID s did not match the rejected FAX number s did match or the destination receiver did not return its phone number U05300 The password check reception or the restricted reception was interrupted because the permitted numbers did not match the rejected numbers did match or the machine in question did not acknowledge its phone number U14000 Memory overflowed during confidential reception Or in subaddress based confidential reception memory overflowed U14100 In interoffice subaddress based transmission memory overflowed in the destination unit U19000 Memory overflowed during memory reception U19100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit during transmission U19300 Transmission failed because an error occurred during JBIG encoding 1 4 49 2PV 2PW 2 1 U004XX error code table Interrupted phase B Error code Description U00430 Polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit number Or subaddress based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit ID in the transmitting unit U00431 An subaddress based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified subaddress confidential box was no
199. it CY GND VREFY 3 3V3 PDYN VDOYP VDOYN GND VREFC 3 3V3 PDCN VDOCP VDOCN Analog 3 3 VDC 0 3 3 V DC pulse LVDS LVDS Analog 3 3 VDC 0 3 3 V DC pulse LVDS LVDS Ground APCPWB Y Laser power reference voltage 3 3 V DC power to APCPWB Y Horizontal synchronizing signal APCPWB Y video data signal APCPWB Y video data signal Ground APCPWB C Laser power reference voltage 3 3 V DC power to APCPWB C Horizontal synchronizing signal APCPWB C video data signal APCPWB C video data signal Connected to controller fan motor 24V1 CONTFAN DRN 24 V DC 0 12 24 V DC 24 V DC power to CONFM CONFM Full speed Half speed Off YC42 Connected to right fan motor 24V1 RFANDRN 24 V DC 0 12 24 V DC 24 V DC power to RFM RFM Full speed Half speed Off YC43 Connected to operation panel PWB 5V1 POWERKEY FPRSTN PANTXD PANRXD 3 3V PANEL_ MODE1 GND PANEL_ MODEO 5V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 3 3 VDC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 2 3 17 5 V DC power to OPPWB Power key input signal OPPWEB reset signal OPPWPB transmission data OPPWEB received data 3 3 V DC power to OPPWB OPPWB mode signal Ground OPPWB mode signal 2PV 2PW 3 Connector Pin Signal Voltage Description YC107 1 VBUS O 5VDC 5 V DC power output Connectedto 2 DATA USB data signal USB 3
200. ive transfer belt clean ing Replace the intermediate transfer unit see page 1 5 22 Defective fuser unit Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 26 Wrong types of paper 14 Part of image is missing Print example Causes Check if the paper meets specifications Replace paper Check procedures corrective measures Paper damp Check the paper storage conditions Paper creased Replace the paper Drum condensation Perform the drum surface refreshing see page 1 3 93 Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum surface refreshing see page 1 3 93 Flawed drum Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 21 Dirty transfer belt Clean the transfer belt Replace the intermediate transfer unit if it is extremely dirty see page 1 5 22 Dirty transfer roller 15 Fusing is loose Print example Causes Clean the transfer roller Replace the transfer roller if it is extremely dirty see page 1 5 25 Check procedures corrective measures Wrong types of paper Check if the paper meets specifications replace paper Flawed heat roller or press roller Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 26 1 4 33 2PV 2PW 16 Colors are printed offset to each other Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Defective color calibration Perform the color calibration refer to operati
201. key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 47 Item No 2PV 2PW 3 Description U600 Initializing all data Description Initializes software switches and all data in the backup data on the FAX control PWB according to the destination and OEM Executes the check of the file system when abnormality of the file system is detected initializes the file system communication past record and register setting contents Purpose To initialize the FAX control PWB Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Country Code and enter a destination code using the numeric keys refer to the des tination code list on following for the destination code OEM code is no operation necessary Select Execute and press the start key Data initialization starts To cancel data initialization press the stop key After data initialization the entered destination OEM codes and ROM version are displayed A ROM version displays three kinds application boot and IPL Destination code list Code Destination Destination 000 007 009 022 038 080 084 088 097 108 115 126 136 137 152 156 159 169 181 Japan Argentina Australia Brazil China Hong Kong Indonesia Israel Korea Malaysia Mexico New Zealand Peru Philippines Saudi Arabiat Singapore South Africa Thailand U S A Russia CTR21 European nations Italy Germany Spain
202. lace if any Defective develop ing release motor Replace the developing release motor Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Fuser motor error The fuser motor ready input is not given for 5 s during the fuser motor is ON Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Fuser motor and engine PWB YC15 Defective drive transmission sys tem of the fuser motor Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective fuser motor Replace the fuser motor Defective engine PWB 1 4 16 Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Contents Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures ISU home position error The home position is not cor rect when the power is turned on or at the start of copying using the table Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Home position sensor and CCD PWB YC3 CCD PWB YC1 and main PWB YC8 ISU motor and main PWB YC36 Defective home position sensor Replace the home position s
203. layed 1 3 66 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U650 Setting modem 1 Description Sets the G3 cable equalizer Sets the modem detection level Purpose Perform the following adjustment to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics To improve the transmission performance when a low quality line is used Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set using the cursor up down keys Display Description Reg G3 TX Eqr Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer Reg G3 RX Eqr Sets the G3 reception cable equalizer RX Mdm Level Sets the modem detection level Setting the G3 transmission cable equalizer 1 Select OdB 4dB 8 or 12dB using the cursor up down keys Initial setting OdB 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting the G3 reception cable equalizer 1 Select OdB 4dB 8dB or 12dB using the cursor up down keys Initial setting OdB 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting the modem detection level 1 Select 33dBm 38dBm 43dBm or 48dBm using the cursor up down keys Initial setting 43dBm 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 67 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U651 Setting modem 2 Description Sets the modem output level Sets the DTMF output level of a push button dial te
204. lephone Purpose Used if problems occur when sending a signal with a push button dial telephone Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set using the cursor up down keys 3 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting Sgl LV Mdm Modem output level 1 to 15 9 120 V 10 220 240 V DTMF LV C DTMF output level 0 to 15 0 5 120 V main value 10 5 220 240 V DTMF LV D DTMF output level 0 to 5 5 2 120 V level difference 2 5 220 240 V 4 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 68 Item No Description U660 Setting the NCU Description Makes setting regarding the network control unit NCU Purpose To be executed as required Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set using the cursor up down keys Display Description Exchange Dial Tone Busy Tone PBX Setting DC Loop Sets the connection to PBX PSTN Sets PSTN dial tone detection Sets busy tone detection Setting for a PBX Sets the loop current detection before dialing Setting the connection to PBX PSTN Selects if a fax is to be connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description
205. ling to transfer Clean the transfer roller Replace the transfer roller if it is roller extremely dirty see page 1 5 25 Dirty LSU dust shield glass Perform the LSU dust shield glass cleaning 8 Black streaks are printed vertically Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Dirty contact glass Clean the contact glass Dirty slit glass Clean the slit glass Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum surface refreshing see page 1 3 93 Flawed drum Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 21 Deformed or worn cleaning Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 21 blade in the drum unit Worn primary transfer belt Replace the intermediate transfer unit see page 1 5 22 Defective transfer roller Replace the transfer roller see page 1 5 25 1 4 31 9 Streaks are printed horizontally Print example Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum surface refreshing See page 1 3 93 Flawed drum Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 21 Dirty developing section Clean any part contaminated with toner in the developing section Poor contact of grounding ter minal of drum unit 10 Spots are printed Print example Causes Check the installation of the drum unit If it operates incor rectly replace it see page 1 5 21 Check procedures corrective measures
206. ly from electronic components Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged After maintenance always check that all the parts screws connectors and wires that were removed have been refitted correctly Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector GD trapped wire and missing screws Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling Replace with new ones if necessary Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below aD Use only a small amount of solvent at a time being careful not to spill Wipe spills off completely Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power Switch on Always wash hands afterwards Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to fire in a f rnace etc eap Should smoke be seen coming from the copier remove the power plug from the wall outlet immedi 3 Miscellaneous A WARNING Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any o
207. mm 180mm Black belt 1 n gt gt A B C Leading edge il Blackbelt 2 Dist1 A B C 3 Dist2 F Dist3 D 2 E 2 sen E Ap e AUN ANE Original for adjustment Black belt 3 P N 302NM94340 Figure 1 3 15 1 3 46 2PV 2PW 3 Item No Description Setting DP This setting is usually unnecessary Display Description Setting range Initial setting Lead A value of length of detecting the lead 14 0 to 16 0 15 0 ing edge Main Scan value of width of main scan 14 0 to 16 0 15 0 Sub Scan value of length of sub scan 265 0 to 269 0 267 0 Measure the distance from the leading edge to the black belt inside of the original at A Enter the measured value using the cursor right left keys or numeric keys in Lead Measure the distance from the left edge to the black belt inside of the original at B Enter the measured value using the cursor right left keys or numeric keys in Main Scan Measure the distance from the black belt of leading edge inside to the black belt of trailing edge inside of the original at C Enter the measured value using the cursor right left keys or numeric keys in Sub Scan Press the start key The value is set Original for adjustment P N 302NM94330 Figure 1 3 16 Completion Press the stop
208. n linefeed 1 Linefeed action P3 Ignores Linefeed Linefeed carriage return Automatic emulation switching P4 AES disabled AES enabled 120V 1 220 240V 0 Automatic emulation switching trigger P7 Page eject commands None Page eject and prescribe EXIT commands Prescribe EXIT commands Formfeed L commands Prescribe EXIT and formfeed commands 0 Page eject commands if AES fails resolves to KPDL 120V 11 220 240V 10 Command recognition character P9 ASCII code of 33 to 126 82 R Default paper size R2 0D O amp Q Q wa a 2x t0 N Size of the default paper cassette See R4 Envelope Monarch Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Executive Letter Legal ISO 4 JIS B5 ISO 5 ISO A6 JIS B6 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 3 4 ISO B5 Custom Postcard Reply paid postcard Oficio 11 16K Statement Folio Youkei 2 53 Youkei 4 Default cassette R4 0 1 2 3 MP tray Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 2 4 4 2PV 2PW Item FRPO Setting values Factory setting MP tray paper size R7 0 Maximum paper size 120V 6 Same as the R2 values except 0 220 240V 8 A4 letter equation S4 0 Off 1 1 On Host buffer size S5 0 10 KB 1 1 100 KB
209. n B arzrne ororo der 2 Precautions for Maintenance AAWARNING Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly Always follow the procedures for maintenance described the service manual and other related Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms and Always use parts having the correct specifications Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure when replacing them Using a piece of wire for example could lead to fire or other serious acci When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a part always use the correct scale and measure Carefully sse Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection D Check that the power cable covering is free of damage Check that the power plug is dust free If it is dirty clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers Leaking laser light may
210. n roller Clean with isopropyl alcohol Defective registration clutch installation Check visually and remedy if necessary 3 Skewed paper feed Paper width guide in a cassette installed incorrectly Check the paper width guide visually and remedy or replace if necessary 4 Multiple sheets of paper are fed Check if the paper is excessively curled Change the paper Paper is loaded incorrectly Load the paper correctly Check if the retard roller is worn Replace the retard roller if it is worn see page 1 5 13 5 Paper jams Check if the paper is excessively curled Change the paper Check if the contact between the front and rear registration rollers is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary Check if the heat roller or press roller is extremely dirty or deformed Check visually and replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 26 6 Abnormal noise is heard Check if the rollers pulleys and gears operate smoothly Grease the bushes and gears Check if the following clutches are installed correctly Paper feed clutch MP feed clutch Registration clutch Middle clutch Check visually and remedy if necessary Check if the following fan motors are installed correctly Left fan motor Right fan motor Controller fan motor Fuser fan motor Container fan motor 1 4 40 Check visually and remedy if necessary Problem
211. nal Control signal YC2004 Connected to ethernet 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TD RD RD RCT CAT PHY ANO PHY CAT MAC ANO MAC 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC pulse pulse 0 3 3 V DC 2 3 19 3 3 V DC power output Transmission data Transmission data Received data Received data 3 3 V DC power output Control signal 3 3 V DC power output Ground Control signal 2PV 2PW 2 3 4 Drum relay PWB Figure 2 3 4 Drum relay PWB silk screen diagram 2 3 20 2PV 2PW Connector Pin Signal Voltage Description YC1 1 TNSENM O Analog TS M detection voltage Connectedto 2 ERASECDR 0 24V DC CL C On Off engine PWB TNsENK O Analog TS K detection voltage 4 ERASEMDR 0 24V DC CL M On Off 5 DLPTHERM O Analog DEVTH detection voltage 6 ERASEKDR 0 24V DC CL K On Off 7 3 3V2 33VDC 3 3 V DC power from EPWB 8 EECLK 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM clock signal 9 GND 10 EEDATA 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM data signal 11 TNSENY O Analog TS Y detection voltage 12 ERASEYDR 0 24V DC CL Y On Off 13 TNSENC Analog TS C detection voltage YC2 1 GND Ground Connectedto 2 EECLK 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM clock signal drum PWB K ERASEKDR 0 24VDC CL K On Off 4 EEDATA 0 3 3 V DC pulse EE
212. nal scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Press the system menu key 3 Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy 4 Press the system menu key 5 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in Display Description range setting value per step Front Scanner leading edge registra 45 to 45 0 0 091 mm tion Rotate Scanner leading edge registra 45 to 45 0 100 mm tion rotate copying 6 Change the setting value using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Increasing the value moves the image forward and decreasing the value moves the image backward Leading edge registration of the copy image 1 0 1 5 mm or less 4t Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 6 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the leading edge registration proceed with the follow ing maintenance modes U034 U065 P 1 3 17 P 1 3 19 066 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 21 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U067 Adjust Table Center Description Adjusts the scanner center line of the original scanning Purp
213. nce request error 14 Main scanning direction center line error 15 DP main scanning direction skew error 16 Main scanning direction magnification error 17 Service call error 18 DP paper misfeed error 19 PWB replacement error 1a Original error 1b Input gamma adjustment original error 1c Matrix adjustment original error 1d Original for the white reference compensation coefficient error 1e Lab value searching error 1f Lab value comparing error 20 Input gamma correction coefficient error 21 Color correction matrix coefficient error 30 Chromatic aberration adjustment original error 63 Completed to obtain a test RAW Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed 1 3 44 2PV 2PW 3 Item No Description Set Target Description Enters the lab values that is indicated on the back of the chart P N 302NM94340 used for adjustment Purpose Performs data input in order to correct for differences in originals during automatic adjustment Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set Display Description Table Setting the value of the table adjustment DP Setting the value of DP adjustment Method Table 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set Display Description White Setting the white patch for the original for adjustment Black Setting the black patch for the original for adjustment Gray1 Setting th
214. nector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Controller fan motor and main PWB YC41 2 Defective motor Replace the controller fan motor Defective PWB Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 30 6 Fuser fan motor does not operate Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Fuser fan motor and engine PWB YC40 Defective motor Replace the fuser fan motor Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 27 7 Container fan motor does not operate Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Container fan motor and engine PWB YC28 Defective motor Replace the container fan motor Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 27 8 ISU motor does not operate Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable ISU motor and main PWB YC36 Defective drive trans mission system Check if th
215. nerates and controls the laser beam yellow PD PWB Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam black PD PWB M Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam magenta PD PWB C Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam cyan PD PWB Y Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam yellow CCD PWB 4 Reads the image of originals LED PWB LEDPWDB Controls the LED LED Driver PWB LEDDRPWB Controls the LED Fax control PWB FCPWB Modulates demodulates compresses decompresses and smoothes out image data and converts resolution of image data 4 in 1 model with FAX only 2 2 2 2PV 2PW List of correspondences of PWB names z 9 Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Main PWB MPWB PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP Engine PWB EPWB PARTS PWB ENGINE ASSY SP Power source PWB PSPWB PARTS SWITCHING REGULATOR SP High voltage PWB HVPWB PARTS HIGH VOLTAGE UNIT SP Operation panel PWB OPPWB Relay PWB RPWB Drum relay PWB DRRPWB Eject PWB EJPWB PARTS PWB ASSY EXIT SP o a A OJN Cassette PWB CPWB PARTS PWB ASSY CASSETTE SP eo Drum PWB K DRPWB K
216. ness Letter Gothic regular 5 Courier regular Letter Gothic regular Color mode W1 Black amp white Color Gloss mode W6 Low normal High Paper type for the MP tray X0 0 1 0 1 1 Plain 2 Transparency 3 Preprinted 4 Label 5 Bond 6 Recycle 7 Vellum 9 Letterhead 10 Color 11 Prepunched 12 Envelope 13 Cardstock 14 Coated 16 Thick 17 High quality 21 to 28 Custom1 to 8 Paper type for cassettes 1 X1 1 Plain 3 Preprinted 5 Bond 6 Recycled 7 Vellum 9 Letterhead 10 Color 11 Prepunched 16 Thick 17 High quality 21 to 28 Custom1 to 8 2 4 6 2PV 2PW Item FRPO Setting values Factory setting Paper type for cassettes 2 and 3 X2 X3 Paper feeder Normal 1 Plain 3 Preprinted 5 Bond 6 Recycled 9 Letterhead 10 Color 11 Prepunched 17 High quality 21 to 28 Custom1 to 8 Multi purpose feeder Plain Preprinted Label Bond Recycle Vellum 9 Letterhead 10 Color 11 Prepunched 12 Envelope 13 Cardstock 14 Coated 16 Thick 17 High quality 21 to 28 Custom1 to 8 1 PCL paper source X9 0 Paper selection depending on an escape sequence compatible with HP LJ5Si 2 Paper selection depending on an escape sequence compatible with HP LJ8000 Automatic continue for Press GO YO 0 Off 1 On Automatic continue tim
217. ng is loose edge of image kled missing begins to print too early or too late aM See page 1 4 32 See page 1 4 32 See page 1 4 33 See page 1 4 33 See page 1 4 33 16 Colors are printed offset to each other See page 1 4 34 1 4 28 1 No image appears entirely white Print example Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures Defective transfer bias output Defective connector cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable High voltage PWB and engine PWB YC11 Defective high voltage PWB Replace the high voltage PWB see page 1 5 35 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 27 Defective developing bias output Defective connector cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable High voltage PWB and engine PWB YC11 Defective high voltage PWB Replace the high voltage PWB see page 1 5 35 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 27 No LSU laser is out put Defective laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit KM CY see page 1 5 45 Defective engine PWB 2 No image appea
218. ng unit 2 Pull the middle roller unit forward to the yJ a hook ae LZ E Ne Hook 3 While pressing the right and left hooks 6 outwards unlatch the shaft from the rail remove the middle roller unit E Middle roller unit conveying unit Figure 1 5 20 1 5 13 2PV 2PW 4 Pull the retard cover down and remove 5 Release two hooks and then remove the retard roller unit 6 Check or replace the retard roller unit and refit all the removed parts 5 un Figure 1 5 21 1 5 14 2PV 2PW 2 Detaching and refitting the paper feed roller unit Procedure 1 Remove the retard roller unit see page 1 5 13 2 Turn forward the lever of the feed pin to release the lock 3 Slide the feed pin MS C i AY Feed pin We f Non RENT Figure 1 5 22 1 5 15 2PV 2PW 4 Remove the paper feed roller unit gt 8 o9 Se o So o oz 5 Q 2 a o o gx c Os Paper feed roller unit Figure 1 5 23 1 5 16 2PV 2PW 3 Detaching and refitting the MP paper feed roller Procedure 1 Remove the cassette 2 Remove the guide sections of the MP tray cover from the MP tray 3 Raise the MP tray cover upward Release two hooks and then remove the MP tray cover 7 SO Guide sections
219. nit 1 5 65 2PV 2PW 2 Remove the ISU cover DP wpe 44 Open the DP top cover and remove the screw fixing the DP rear cover Figure 1 5 106 45 Open the Document Processor and Hooks release two hooks fixing the original tray And close the Document Processor Figure 1 5 107 1 5 66 2PV 2PW 2 Original tray 46 Slide the cursors to the center of the original tray and lift up the original tray ursols Figure 1 5 108 DP top cover 47 Release three hooks in the machine rear side of the DP rear cover in the order of hook A B C Release the hook D and E at the machine front side while rotating the DP rear cover in the arrow s direction and then remove it Release the hook A B and C while press ing the upper part of the hook to prevent the hook from breaking HookD Hook E Figure 1 5 109 1 5 67 48 Remove two screws and disconnect two connectors from the DP drive PWB 49 Press the DP lock lever through the hole at the bottom right side of the scanner unit by inserting a screwdriver etc and open the Document Proces sor 2PV 2PW 2 Connectors DP drive PWB Screws DP wire Figure 1 5 110 Document processor Af Figure 1 5 111 1 5 68 2PV 2PW 2 2 3 50 Remove the wire cover N Wire cover Figure 1 5 112 Document processor 51 Detach the Document Processor Figure 1 5 113 1 5 69 2PV 2PW
220. nit non Defective connec Reinsert the connector Also check for conti installing error tor cable or poor nuity within the connector cable If none No density detection signal is contact in the con replace the cable output from toner sensor nector Developing unit K and Drum relay PWB developing unit K YC6 Drum relay PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC34 Defective toner Replace the developing unit K see page 1 sensor K 5 19 Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation see page 1 5 27 7402 Developing unit C non Defective connec Reinsert the connector Also check for conti installing error tor cable or poor nuity within the connector cable If none No density detection signal is contact in the con replace the cable output from toner sensor C in nector Developing unit C and Drum relay PWB developing unit C YC10 Drum relay PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC34 Defective toner Replace the developing unit C see page 1 sensor C 5 19 Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation see page 1 5 27 7403 Developing unit M non Defective connec Reinsert the connector Also check for conti installing error No density detection signal is output from toner sensor M in developing unit M tor cable or poor contact in the con nector nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Developing unit M and Drum relay PWB
221. ntenance items below To change the initial settings in those items be sure to run maintenance item U021 after changing the destination 1 3 32 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U253 Switching between double and single counts Description Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters Purpose Used to select according to the preference of the user copy service provider if folio size paper is to be counted as one sheet single count or two sheets double count Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item using the cursor up down keys Display Description Color Count system of color mode B W Count system of black white mode Press the start key Select the count system using the cursor up down keys Display Description SGL Count All Single count for all size paper DBL Count Folio Double count for Folio size or larger Initial setting DBL Count Folio 5 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Selecting the timing for copy counting Description Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters Purpose To be set according to user request Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the copy count timing using the cursor up down keys Display Description Feed When secondary paper feed start
222. ntionally left blank 2 2 10 2PV 2PW 2 3 1 Power source PWB Figure 2 3 1 Power source PWB silk screen diagram 2 3 1 Connector Connected to AC inlet and main power switch LIVE NEUTRAL 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 2PV 2PW Description AC power input AC power input YC102 Connected to fuser heater NEUTRAL LIVE 120 V AC O V 220 240 V AC O V 120 V AC 220 240 V AC FH On Off AC power to FH YC103 Connected to relay PWB 24V1 GND GND GND GND 24V2 24V2 24V2 24V2 PSSLEEPN ZCROSS RELAY HEATRE1 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 24 V DC power to RYPWB Ground Ground Ground Ground 24 V DC power to RYPWB via ILSW 24 V DC power to RYPWB via ILSW 24 V DC power to RYPWB via ILSW 24 V DC power to RYPWB via ILSW Sleep mode signal On Off Zero cross signal Power relay signal On Off FH On Off Connected to interlock switch 24V1 N C 24V2 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ILSW Not used 24 V DC power from ILSW YC105 Connected to main PWB 24V1 GND GND 5V1 24 V DC 2 3 2 24 V DC power to MPWB Ground Ground 5 V DC power to MPWB 2PV 2PW 2 3 2 Engine PWB lt N o L LI 4 YC24 YC38 25 YC11 N lt YC12 1
223. nue Takapuna Auckland New Zealand Phone 64 9 415 4517 Fax 64 9 415 4597 KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited 16 F Mita Centre 552 566 Castle Peak Road Tsuenwan NT Hong Kong Phone 852 2610 2181 Fax 852 2610 2063 KYOCERA Document Solutions China Corporation 8F No 288 Nanjing Road West Huangpu District Shanghai 200003 China Phone 86 21 5301 1777 Fax 86 21 5302 8300 KYOCERA Document Solutions Thailand Corp Ltd 335 Ratchadapisek Road Bangsue Bangkok 10800 Thailand Phone 66 2 586 0333 Fax 66 2 586 0278 KYOCERA Document Solutions Singapore Pte Ltd 12 Tai Seng Street 04 01A Luxasia Building Singapore 534118 Phone 65 6741 8733 Fax 65 6748 3788 KYOCERA Document Solutions Hong Kong Limited 16 F Mita Centre 552 566 Castle Peak Road Tsuenwan NT Hong Kong Phone 852 3582 4000 Fax 852 3185 1399 KYOCERA Document Solutions Taiwan Corporation 6F No 37 Sec 3 Minquan E Rd Zhongshan Dist Taipei 104 Taiwan R O C Phone 886 2 2507 6709 Fax 886 2 2507 8432 KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co Ltd 18F Kangnam bldg 1321 1 Seocho Dong Seocho Gu Seoul Korea Phone 822 6933 4050 Fax 822 747 0084 KYOCERA Document Solutions India Private Limited First Floor ORCHID CENTRE Sector 53 Golf Course Road Gurgaon 122 002 India Phone 91 0124 4671000 Fax 91 0124 4671001 KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B V Bloemlaan 4 2132 NP
224. on U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts one time only Description Resets all of the counts back to zero Supplement The total account counter and the machine life counter can be cleared only once if all count val ues are 1000 or less Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Execute 3 Press the start key All copy counts and machine life counts are cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U928 Checking machine life counts Description Displays the machine life counts Purpose To check the machine life counts Method 1 Press the start key The current machine life counts is displayed Display Description Cnt Machine life counts Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 79 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U977 Data capture mode Description Store the print data sent to the machine into USB memory Purpose In case to occur the error at printing check the print data sent to the machine Method 1 Insert USB memory in USB memory slot Turn the main power switch on Enter the maintenance item Press the start key Select Execute Press the start key Send the print data to the machine Once the print data is stored into USB memory OK will be displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a
225. on 500 Sends an NSF CSI or DIS 500 ms after receiving a CED 75 Sends an NSF CSI or DIS 75 ms after receiving a CED Initial setting 75 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 58 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U631 Setting communication control 2 Description Makes settings regarding fax transmission Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set using the cursor up down keys Display ECM TX ECM RX CED Freq Description Sets ECM transmission Sets ECM reception Sets the frequency of the CED signal Setting ECM transmission To be set to Off when reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality This should not be set to Off when connecting to the IP Internet Protocol telephone line 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description On Off ECM transmission is enabled ECM transmission is disabled Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting ECM reception To be set to Off when reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality This should not be set to Off when connecting to the IP Internet Protocol telephone line 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description On Off
226. on guide Slip the mirror position of laser scanner unit Perform the normal color registration When the problem is not cleared perform the detail color registration adjust ment refer to operation guide 1 4 34 1 4 4 Electric problems 2PV 2PW If the part causing the problem was not supplied use the unit including the part for replacement Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 The machine does not operate when the main power switch is turned on 1 No electricity at the power outlet Measure the input voltage The power cord is not plugged in prop erly Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet The inner tray is not closed completely Check the inner tray Broken power cord Check for continuity If none replace the cord 5 Defective main power switch Check for continuity across the contacts If none replace the power source PWB see page 1 5 29 Defective interlock switch Check for continuity across the contacts of interlock switch If none replace the power source PWB see page 1 5 29 Defective power source PWB Replace the power source PWB see page 1 5 29 2 Duplex motor does not operate Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also c
227. ooks hook A B and then remove the front cover Front cover 229 24 B 23 5 Figure 1 5 7 2PV 2PW 2 Detaching and refitting the right rear cover right cover and right lower cover Procedure 1 Remove the rear upper cover right upper cover left upper cover and front cover see page 1 5 3 2 Slide the power source cover backward and then remove it ES Figure 1 5 8 3 Remove the screw WN JZS 4 Release four hooks Slide the right rear RY cover backward and then remove it ul 4 222 i gt 2 2 4 2 2e 2 Right rear gt SAA 2 2 05 2 OA 2 a 2 1 5 9 1 5 6 Power source cover cover Right rear cover 2PV 2PW 5 Open the memory cover and then remove it 6 Open the waste toner cover 7 Push the lock release button and then remove the waste toner box Waste toner cover Waste toner box Figure 1 5 11 1 5 7 2PV 2PW 8 Release four hooks hook A B Slide the right cover forward and then remove it 9 Remove the waste toner cover Right cover Waste toner cover Figure 1 5 12 10 Release the hook Slide the right lower cover forward and then remove it 4 NVA LI lL PSY 7 5 Right lower cover Figure 1 5 13 1 5 8 2PV 2PW
228. oper refresh Description The laser output of the image data for developer refreshing is carried out and operation to exposure developing and primary transfer is performed by 10 pages paper is not fed Purpose To perform cleaning when faulty images occur and a line appears longitudinally Method 1 Enter the Service Setting menu 2 Select DeveloperRefresh using the cursor up down keys 3 Press the start key 4 Press Yes the Left Select key Developer refresh is performed A4 paper size 200 mm Toner image on the transfer belt Figure 1 3 22 Completion Press the stop key 1 3 92 Service items 2PV 2PW Description Laser Scanner Cleaning Performing LSU cleaning Description The LSU cleaning motor drives the cleaning pad which in turn wipes clean the LSU dust shield glass Purpose To perform cleaning when the printed image is bad and stripes are seen in the vertical direction Method 1 Enter the Service Setting menu 2 Select LaserScanner Cln using the cursor up down keys 3 Press the start key 4 Press Yes the Left Select key LSU cleaning is performed Completion Press the stop key Drum surface refreshing Performing drum surface refreshing Description Rotates the drum approximately 2 minutes with toner lightly on the overall drum The cleaning blade in the drum unit scrapes toner off the drum surface to clean it Purpose To clean the drum surfac
229. ose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Press the system menu key 3 Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy 4 Press the system menu key 5 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in Display Description range setting value per step Front Scanner center line 40 to 40 0 0 085 mm Rotate Scanner center line rotate 40 to 40 0 0 100 mm copying Change the setting value using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 decrease the value For copy example 2 increase the value Increasing the value moves the image leftward and decreasing it moves the image rightward Center line of the copy image within 2 0 mm t1 Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 7 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the center line proceed with the following mainte nance modes U034 U065 P 1 3 17 P 1 3 19 067 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 22 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U068 Adjust DP Scan Position Description Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP Performs the test copy at the four scan ning positions after adjusting Purpose Used when the
230. other information Self Sts Report Outputs a list of settings in maintenance mode own status report regarding fax transmission only Protocol List Outputs a list of transmission procedures Error List Outputs a list of error Addr List No Outputs address book in order IDs were added Adar List Idx Outputs address book in order of names One touch List Outputs a list of one touch Group List Outputs a list of group Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 71 2PV 2PW Item No Description U695 FAX function customize Description Sets fax batch transmission ON OFF Also changes the print size priority at the time of small size reception Purpose To be executed as required Setting 1 Select the setting using the cursor up down keys Display Description FAX Bulk TX fax batch transmission On Off Ad Pt Pri Chg Change of print size priority at the time of small size reception Setting FAX Bulk TX 1 Select On or Off using the cursor left right keys Display Description On Fax batch transmission is enabled Off Fax batch transmission is disabled Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting A5 Pt Pri Chg 1 Select ON or OFF using the cursor left right keys Display Description On At the time of A5 size reception gt 5 gt 4 Off At the time of
231. paper torn from an original is caught around the DP timing sensor Check visually and remove it if any tumed on 2 Defective DP timing Replace the DP timing sensor sensor 24 1 Defective connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the A message indicat ing cover open is displayed when the DP top cover is closed cable or poor con tact in the connector connector cable If none replace the cable DP open close sensor and DP drive PWB YC2 DP drive PWB YC8 and main PWB YC32 Defective DP open close sensor Replace the DP open close sensor 1 4 39 1 4 5 Mechanical problems 2PV 2PW If the part causing the problem was not supplied use the unit including the part for replacement Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 1 No primary paper feed Check if the surfaces of the following roll ers are dirty with paper powder Pickup roller Paper feed roller MP paper feed roller Clean with isopropyl alcohol Check if the following rollers is deformed Pickup roller Paper feed roller MP paper feed roller Check visually and replace any deformed see page 1 5 15 1 5 17 Defective paper feed clutch installation Check visually and remedy if necessary 2 No secondary paper feed Check if the surfaces of the following roll ers are dirty with paper powder Front registration roller Rear registratio
232. per 2 component Toner replenishing Automatic from the toner container Transfer system Primary Transfer belt Secondary Transfer roller Separation system Small diameter separation Cleaning system Drum Counter blade Charge erasing system Exposure by cleaning lamp LED Fusing system Heat and pressure fusing with the heat roller and the press roller Heat source halogen heater Abnormally high temperature protection devices thermostat CPU 4655 667MHz Main Standard 1GB memory Maximum 2 GB USB interface connector 1 USB Hi speed Standard USB host 2 Interface Network interface 1 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T Option eKUIO slot 1 Resolution 600 x 600 dpi Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Operating Humidity 15 to 80 RH environment Altitude 2 500 m 8 202 ft or less Brightness 1 500 lux or less Dimensions W x D x H 514 x 550 x 580 mm 20 1 4 x 21 5 8 x 22 13 16 Weight 36 5 kg 80 3 Ib with toner container Space required W x D 514 x 1020 mm using MP tray 20 1 4 x 40 3 16 using MP tray Rated input 120 V AC 60 Hz more than 8 9 A 220 240 V AC 50 60 Hz more than 4 7 A Options Paper feeder x 2 Expanded memory Card authentication kit Card reader holder USB keyboard SSD 1 1 2 Document processor Item 2PV 2PW Specifications Original feed method Automatic feed
233. per Jam Log d Detail of paper type Hexadecimal 01 Plain 02 Transparency 03 Preprinted 04 Labels 05 Bond 06 Recycled 07 Vellum 08 Rough 09 Letterhead OA Color OB Prepunched OC Envelope OD Cardstock OE Coated OF 2nd side 10 Media 16 11 High quality 15 Custom 1 16 Custom 2 17 Custom 3 18 Custom 4 19 Custom 5 1A Custom 6 1B Custom 7 1C Custom 8 e Detail of paper eject location Hexadecimal 01 Face down FD Service Call Log Count Service Code Remembers 1 to 8 of occurrence of self diagnostics error If the occurrence of the previous diag nostics error is less than 8 all of the diagnostics errors are logged The total page count at the time of the self diagnostics error Self diagnostic error code See page 1 4 7 Example 01 6000 01 Self diagnostic error 6000 Self diagnostic error code number Maintenance Log Count Item Remembers 1 to 8 of occurrence of replacement If the occurrence of the previous replace ment of toner con tainer is less than 8 all of the occur rences of replace ment are logged 1 3 10 The total page count at the time of the replacement of the toner container The toner replacement log is triggered by toner empty This record may contain such a ref erence as the toner container is inserted twice or a used toner con tainer is inserte
234. ple FRONT set to 15 BACK set to 3 IR KCFG SCAN 3 1 15 KCFG SCAN 3 2 3 EXIT DP center line Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 2 4 16 2PV 2PW 5 Wiring diagram x 9 E v NO as 69 z mse eae O NO NO a gt CN m NO x z a ite gt Zi eo Blu ze 2 2 2 2 la m zio gt ra Z Z ra z iA 2 Ja o IBS 999 o9 18 99 amp E e glo sekal amp ss ss 55 992 399 zo gt gt gt z o Elo ON s CO QN CO s 10 bain wc La s ow t PSSLEEP 24V1 GND 15 15 TUQUE SMOD 5 1 age ait 1 1 GNDIGND 3 4 3 4 YC13 14 YC23 26 25 YC24 YC36 YC20 O 2 16 I2CINT 212 GND 24V3 5 6 5 6 I 3 15 3 3 24V3 424V3 YC8 EGHOLD 78 7 8 m 4 1714 24V3IGND 940 1320 55 SLEEPN HYPINT 44742 11 12 12 VSYNC 2 3 3 2 43744 13 14 10 EGIRN a 5 SBSY 3 3V1_MFP MPFJAM 2 Serial 9 9 spin 9 9 12 18 19 18 Option DIMM 5
235. pro cedures 1 5 77 2PV 2PW 1 5 11 Document processor 1 Detaching and refitting the document processor Procedure 1 Remove the rear upper cover right upper cover left upper cover and front cover see page 1 5 3 2 Remove left and right pins and then close the inner tray 3 Release three hooks and then remove the upper middle cover Figure 1 5 128 1 5 78 2PV 2PW 4 Remove the right rear cover right cover and right lower cover see page 1 5 6 5 Remove the controller shield see page 1 5 30 6 Remove connector YC32 from main PWB Main PWB Figure 1 5 129 7 Cut the band and then remove the it 8 Remove the DP wire and ground wire from wire holder 9 Close the scanner unit Figure 1 5 130 1 5 79 2PV 2PW 10 Press the DP lock lever through the hole at the bottom right side of the scanner unit and open the document Document processor processor UI GE p Figure 1 5 131 1 5 80 2PV 2PW 11 Remove the wire cover gt 2 Figure 1 5 132 o o il xs c E 2 o gt E o N Document processor Figure 1 5 133 1 5 81 2PV 2PW 2 Detaching and refitting the DP paper feed
236. pses In fax telephone auto select mode change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys Description Setting range Initial setting Ta time out time 1 to 255 30 2 Press the start key The value is set Line connection fax machine Ring back tone send start w Start of fax reception a Ring detection e N Figure 1 3 17 Ta Tb1 Tb2 time out time Setting the Tb1 time out time In the fax telephone auto select mode sets the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call as a fax machine see figure 1 3 17 In fax telephone auto select mode change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys Description Setting Initial Change in value range setting per step Tb1 time out time 1 to 255 20 100 ms 2 Press the start key The value is set 1 3 65 2PV 2PW Item No Description U641 Setting the Tb2 time out time In the fax telephone auto select mode sets the time to start ringing an operator through the con nected telephone after receiving a call as a fax machine see figure 1 3 17 In the fax telephone auto select mode change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call
237. r in the auto reduction mode Increase the setting if a page received the reduction mode is over reduced and too much trailing edge margin is left Decrease it if the received image does not include all transmitted data 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 52 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U611 Setting system 2 Description Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set using the cursor up down keys Display Description Adj Lines Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction Adj Lines A4 Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set Adj Lines LT Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys Description Setting range Initial setting Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction 0 to 22 7 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduc
238. r which corresponds to the see page 1 5 21 color causing the problem Laser of laser scanner unit for Replace the laser scanner unit KM CY solid color printing is ON see page 1 5 45 Defective laser scanner unit 4 The back side gets dirty Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Dirty secondary transfer roller Clean the secondary transfer roller Dirty paper conveying path Clean the paper conveying path Dirty heat roller and press Clean the heat roller and press roller roller 5 Image is too light Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Defective Defective developing unit Replace the developing unit for the color that developing causes an error see page 1 5 19 bias output Defective high voltage Replace the high voltage PWB PWB see page 1 5 35 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 27 Defective drum unit Decrease the surface potential by performing the main charger adjustment see page 1 3 94 When the problem is not cleared replace the drum unit see page 1 5 21 Defective Defective high voltage Replace the high voltage PWB see page 1 5 transfer PWB 35 bias output Defective engine PWB Replace the engine see page 1 5 27 Defective color calibration Perform the color calibration Refer to opera tion guide Insufficient toner If the display s
239. r example INFOO0 B Bbar A Abar for polling reception probing tone was not detected 001810 A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in phase 3 primary channel equivalent device training For example S Sbar PP TRN was not detected U01820 A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after initiating the control channel before entering the T 30 process For example PPh ALT MPh E was not detected U01821 In the absence of a common communication speed between units including when an impossible combination of communication speed and symbol speed occurs after MPh exchange a DCN signal was transmitted to the destination unit and the line was cut 1 4 53 2PV 2PW This page is intentionally left blank 1 4 54 2PV 2PW 1 5 1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly 1 Precautions Before starting disassembly press the Power key on the operation panel to off Make sure that the Power lamp is off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet When the fax kit is installed be sure to disconnect the modular code before starting disassembly When handling PWBs printed wiring boards do not touch parts with bare hands The PWBs are susceptible to static charge Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge When removing the hook of the connector be sure to release the hook Take care not to get the c
240. r poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF heater 2 and PF heater PWB YC2 PF heater PWB YC3 and PF main PWB YC113 PF thermistor 2 and PF main PWB YC115 PF thermistor 2 installed incor rectly Check the installation of the PF thermistor 2 Defective PF thermistor 2 Replace the side heater unit Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Broken PF heater 2 Replace the side heater unit Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Defective PF heater PWB or PF main PWB Replace the PF heater PWB or PF main PWB Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder PF heater 1 low temperature error paper feeder 2 An external temperature higher than 5 C 9 F is not detected when one minute elapses after PF heater 1 is turned on Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF heater 1 and PF heater PWB YC1 PF heater PWB YC3 and PF main PWB YC113 PF thermistor 1 and PF main PWB 114 PF thermistor 1 installed incor rectly Check the installation of the PF thermistor 1 Defective PF thermistor 1 Replace the top heater unit Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder Broken PF heater 1
241. r responded with an error Confirm device s network parameters Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected Check the FTP server 1 4 44 3 Scan to E mail error codes Contents SMTP POP3 server does not exist on the network 2PV 2PW 3 Check procedures corrective measures Check the SMTP POP3 server name Confirm device s network parameters Confirm the parameters of the network to which the device is connected are correct Login to the SMTP POPS server has failed Confirm user name and password Check the SMTP POP3 server The domain the destined address belongs is prohibited by scanning restriction Confirm device s SMTP parameters SMTP protocol is not enabled Confirm device s SMTP protocols Sender s address is not specified Confirm device s SMTP protocols Connection to the SMTP POP3 server has failed Check the SMTP POP3 server name Confirm that the LAN cable is properly connected to the device Check the SMTP POP3 port number Confirm device s network parameters Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected Check the SMTP POP3 server Connection to the SMTP POP3 server has failed Connection timeout Check the SMTP POP3 server name Check the SMTP POP3 port number Confirm device s network parameters Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected Check the SM
242. re to replace one by one Contents Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures Main PWB operation panel PWB communication error Defective main PWB Turn the main power switch off on to restart the machine If the error is not resolved replace main PWB see page 1 5 30 Defective opera tion panel PWB Replace the operation panel PWB and check for correct operation Main PWB checksum error Defective main PWB Turn the main power switch off on to restart the machine If the error is not resolved replace main PWB see page 1 5 30 Main PWB RAM checksum error Defective main memory RAM on the main PWB Turn the main power switch off on to restart the machine If the error is not resolved replace main PWB see page 1 5 30 Defective expanded memory DIMM Replace the expanded memory DIMM see page 1 2 12 Main PWB print engine communication error Defective main PWB Turn the main power switch off on to restart the machine If the error is not resolved replace main PWB see page 1 5 30 Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Main PWB scanner engine communication error Defective main PWB Turn the main power switch off on to restart the machine If the error is not resolved replace main PWB see page 1 5 30 Print engine ROM check sum error Defective engine PWB Turn the main power
243. refitting the paper conveying 1 5 88 2 Detaching and refitting the operation 1 5 90 3 Detaching and refitting the power source inlet sm 1 5 91 4 Direction of installing the principal fan motors 1 5 93 1 6 Requirements on PWB Replacement 1 6 1 Upgrading the 1 6 1 1 6 2 Remarks engine PWB replacement 1 6 3 2 1 Mechanical Construction 2 1 1 Paper feed conveying 2 1 1 1 Cassette paper feed 22 2 1 1 11100111 1 2 1 1 2 MP tray paper feed 2 1 3 3 Paper CONVEYING section 2 1 0 a inte 2 1 5 221 2 DRUM Sect O m 2 1 7 2 1 3 Developirig c et deno ere OR RCM 2 1 9 2 1 4 OptiCal SectiOn eto mee eme ee ele e 2 1 11 1 Image scanrner Sectiori ipe I eek et dene e PL ERU eh ipa ien ERR 2 1 11 2 Lasot scanner Sectlom ite pecie eue 2 1 14 2 1 5 Transfer Separation section 2 1 16 1 Intermediate transfer unit mmm 2 1 16 2 Secondary transfer roller 2 1 18 2 1 6 0 Nm 2 1 19 2 1 7 Eject Feedshif
244. rganic solvents such as alcohol other than the specified refiner it may generate toxic Keep the machine away from flammable liquids gases and aerosols A fire or an electric shock m This page is intentionally left blank 1 1 1 3 1 4 2PV 2PW 2 CONTENTS Specifications 1 1 1 Specifications nn reete 1 1 1 131 2 Parts names erede eue Ubi idee aUi ui Dip 1 1 6 T Machine front 19 sed ptt Hn Ed RUE CELER EUR e ODE Eg 1 1 6 2y Machine rear SIMS si ct ti i i P a Tot o e MO e NE Lo ER t Mo dag gat 1 1 7 3 Document processSOr erret oe rite n e dr ne eee 1 1 8 4 Operation panel 1 1 9 1 1 3 Machine cross SOCUOM oe t tn ERR 1 1 10 Installation 1 2 1 Installation 1 11 teen ennt ennt tentent nnne tnter t netten it nennen nennen nnne 1 2 1 1 222 Unpatcking Rm dme HC erret 1 2 2 1 2 3 Installing the expansion memory 1 2 12 Maintenance Mode 123 1 Mainteriancedmode on eene ete eet ien etaed bete e ede PER 1 3 1 1 Executing a maintenance 1 3 1 2 Maintenance modes item list emen mene 1 3 2 3 Contents of the maintenance mode 1 3
245. rk parameters the device is con nected Check the FTP server name 2102 Access to the FTP server has failed Connection timeout WN Check the FTP server name Check the FTP port number Confirm device s network parameters Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected Check the FTP server name 2103 The server cannot establish communi cation Check the FTP server name Check the FTP port number Confirm device s network parameters Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected Check the FTP server name 2201 Connection with the FTP server has failed Na Confirm device s network parameters Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected Confirm destined folder Check the FTP server name 2202 Connection with the FTP server has failed Timeout gt Confirm device s network parameters Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected 2203 No response from the server during a certain period of time Confirm device s network parameters Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected 1 4 43 2PV 2PW 3 Contents Check procedures corrective measures Connection with the FTP server has 1 Confirm device s network parameters failed 2 Confirm the network parameters the device is con FTPS communication nected FTP serve
246. rror codes 1 Error code Error codes are listed on the communication reports activity report etc The codes consist of an error code indication U followed by a 5 digit number Error codes for V34 communication errors start with an E indica tion followed by five digits The upper three of the five digits indicate general classification of the error and its cause while the lower two indicate the detailed classification Items for which detailed classification is not necessary have 00 as the last two digits Error code UXXXXX Detailed classification of error code General classification of error code Error code indication Figure 1 4 5 1 4 47 2PV 2PW 2 Table of general classification Error code Description U00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials U00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop clear key U00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the stop clear key U00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission U004XX A connection was made but interrupted during handshake with the receiver unit refer to 1 4 50 0004 error code table U006XX Communication was interrupted because of a machine problem refer to 1 4 50 0006 error code table U00700 Communication was interrupted because of a problem in the destination unit U008XX A page transmission error occurred in G3 mod
247. rs entirely black Print example Causes Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 27 Check procedures corrective measures No main charging Defective connector cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable High voltage PWB and engine PWB YC11 Defective charger roller unit Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 21 Defective high voltage PWB Replace the high voltage PWB see page 1 5 35 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 27 Exposure lamp fails to light Defective connector cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Exposure lamp and inverter PWB CN2 Inverter PWB CN1 and CCD PWB YC3 CCD PWB YC1 and main PWB YC8 Defective inverter PWB or CCD PWB Replace the scanner unit see page 1 5 48 Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB see page 1 5 30 The laser is activated simultane ously for all colors Defective laser scanner unit 1 4 29 Replace the laser scanner unit KM CY see page 1 5 45 2PV 2PW 3 A specific color is printed solid Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Defective charger roller unit Replace the drum unit for the color that causes an erro
248. ry in USB memory slot Turn the main power switch on Wait for 10 seconds to allow the machine to recognize the USB memory Enter the maintenance item Press the start key Select Export or Import and press the start key Display Description Import Writing data from the USB memory to the machine Export Retrieving from the machine to a USB memory Select the item Display Description Depending data Address Address book Job Accnt Job accounting One Touch Information on one touch key Address book User User managements Job accounting Document Document box information Job accountings and user manage ments Fax Fwd FAX transfer information Job accountings user managements and document box information System System setting information Network Network setting information Job Set JOb setting information Printer Printer setting information Fax set FAX setting information Program Program information Job accountings user managements and document box information Panel Set Panel setting information Job accountings user managements and document box information Since data are dependent with each other data other than those assigned are also retrieved or written in 1 3 76 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U917 8 Select On 9 Press the start key Starts reading or writing The progress of selected item is displayed in When an error occurs the op
249. s Eject When the paper is ejected Initial setting Eject 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 33 2PV 2PW Item No Description 0285 Setting service status page Description Determines displaying the print coverage report on reporting Purpose According to user request changes the setting Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select On or Off using the cursor up down keys Display Description On Displays the print coverage Off Not to display the print coverage Initial setting On 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 34 2PV 2PW Item No Description U332 Setting the size conversion factor Description Rate Setting a factor to convert a non standard size paper to A4 Letter The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4 Letter size and to display the result in user simulation Mode Make settings on the color copy and color print coverage counter displays as well as the coverage threshold Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to set Display Description Rate Size coefficient Mode Toggling full color count and color coverage count display Level 1 Low coverage threshold value
250. s deae rte ente diner orden dee 2 4 1 2 Repetitive defects 6 2 0 21 0 2 4 2 3 Firmware environment 2 4 3 4 Maintenance 2 4 9 by Wiring dlagEatTi et crm tomes ette er t e be a a eR ta deae RE Te RE 2 4 17 2PV 2PW 1 1 1 Specifications Machine Item Specifications 3 in 1 model without FAX 4in 1 model with FAX Type Desktop Printing method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser tandem 4 drum system Originals Sheet Book 3 dimensional objects maximum original size Folio Legal Original feed system Fixed Cassette 60 to 163 g m Duplex 60 to 163 g m Paper weight tray 60 to 220 g m 230 mm Cardstock Cassette Plain Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Colour Prepunched Letterhead Thick High quality Custom 1 to 8 Duplex Same as simplex Paper type MP tray Plain Transparency Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Colour Prepunched Letterhead Thick Envelope Coated High quality Custom 1 to 8 Cassette A4 A5 A6 B5 Letter Legal Statement Executive Oficio Il Folio 16K Custom Paper size MP tray 5 B5 ISO B5 B6 Letter Legal Statement
251. s light ning rods ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper as Cena E CAUTION Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface the copier may tip over causing injury e Do not install the copier a humid or dusty place This may cause fire or electric shock Do not install the copier near radiator heater other heat source or near flammable material This uc IB c Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as possible Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving Always use anti toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped Failure to do this may cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple leading e Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively Protect the eyes If toner or developer is accidentally ingested drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately If it gets into the eyes rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical atten Ic Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier s INnStructio
252. s are listed as optional values on the service status page Note Before changing any FRPO parameter print out a service status page so you will know the parameter values before the changes are made To return FRPO parameters to their factory default values send the FRPO INIT FRPO INITialize command R FRPO INIT The FRPO command is sent to the printer in the following sequence IR FRPO parameter value EXIT Example Changing emulation mode to PCL6 IR FRPO P1 6 EXIT FRPO parameters Item FRPO Setting values setting Default pattern resolution B8 0 300 dpi 0 1 600 dpi Page orientation C1 0 Portrait 0 1 Landscape Default font No C2 Middle two digits of power up font 0 C3 Last two digits of power up font 0 C5 First two digits of power up font 0 PCL font switch C8 0 HP compatibility mode 0 32 Conventional compatibility mode Total host buffer size H8 Oto 99 in units of the size defined by FRPO 55 5 Form feed time out value H9 Value in units of 5 seconds 1 to 99 6 Duplex mode Off 0 1 Long edge binding 2 Short edge binding Sleep timer time out time Value in units of 1 minute 1 to 240 1 Ecoprint level O Off 0 2 On 2 4 3 2PV 2PW Item FRPO Setting values Factory setting Default emulation mode P1 POL 6 KPDL 120V 9 220 240V 6 Carriage return action P2 Ignores Carriage return Carriage retur
253. s incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Press the system menu key 3 Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy 4 Press the system menu key 5 Select Convey Speed Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Convey Magnification in the auxiliary 25 to 25 0 0 1 Speed scanning direction of CCD first side Display Description 6 Change the setting value using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Increasing the value makes the image longer while decreasing the value makes the image shorter Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 8 7 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 24 2PV 2PW Item No Description 0071 Adjust DP Leading Edge Timing Description Adjusts the DP original scanning timing Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the origi nal and the copy image when the DP is used Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press the system menu key 3 Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy 4 Press the system menu key 5 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Chan
254. section eei a e dT duse ume Ted a 1 5 13 1 Detaching and refitting the retard 1 5 13 2 Detaching and refitting the paper feed roller 1 5 15 3 Detaching and refitting the MP paper feed 1 5 17 1 5 4 Developing Section cedere ice er tiere e d D dann e 1 5 19 1 Detaching and refitting the developing unit seem 1 5 19 1 5 5 Dr mrsectlon za oC d e BU 1 5 21 1 Detaching and refitting the drum unit eem 1 5 21 1 5 6 Transfer Separation 1 5 22 1 Detaching and refitting the intermediate transfer 1 5 22 2 Detaching and refitting the transfer roller 1 5 25 1 5 7 Fuser Section ii ae Pec e a Pd e vete o 1 5 26 1 Detaching and refitting the fuser 1 5 26 1 5 8 PWB a ite rede e cese me ente p viene DR Que er Tee ae D e uae enda 1 5 27 1 Detaching and refitting the engine 1 5 27 2 Detaching and refitting the power source 1 5 29 3 Detaching and refitting the main 1 5 30 4 Detaching and refitting the high voltage
255. sensor ES does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray Eject sensor remaining jam The eject sensor ES is turned on when the power is turned on No original feed The DP timing sensor DPTS does not turn on within specified time during the first sheet feeding Retry 5 times An original jam in the original conveying section DP timing sensor DPTS turns off within the speci fied time since the sensor turns on An original jam in the original switchback section 1 During duplex switchback scanning the DP timing sensor DPTS does not turn off within specified time An original jam in the original switchback section 2 During duplex switchback scanning the DP timing sensor DPTS does not turn on within specified time since original switchback operation starts DP top cover open The DP or DP top cover is opened during original feeding An original jam in the original conveying section The DP timing sensor DPTS does not turn off within specified time of the DP timing sensor DPTS turning on Refer to figure 1 4 2 for paper jam location see page 1 4 2 1 4 5 2PV 2PW 1 4 2 Self diagnostic function 1 Self diagnostic function This machine is equipped with self diagnostic function When a problem is detected the machine stops print ing and display an error message on the operation panel An error message consists of a message prompting a contact to servic
256. setting changes End 2 Maintenance modes item list 2PV 2PW 2 Section a Content of maintenance item bonn General 0000 Outputting an own status report U001 Exit Maintenance Mode U002 Setting the factory default data U004 Setting the machine number U010 Set Mainte ID U019 Firmware Version Initialization UO21 Memory initializing Drive paper U034 Adjust Paper Timing Data feed and LSU Out Top 600 0 0 0 paper LSU Out Left 600 0 0 0 0 0 conveying system Optical 0065 Adjust Scanner Motor Speed 0 0 0066 Adjust Table Leading Edge Timing 0 0 U067 Adjust Table Center 0 0 U068 Adjust DP Scan Position 0 0 U070 Adjust DP Motor Speed 0 U071 Adjust DP Leading Edge Timing 0 0 0 0 0 U072 Adjust DP Original Center 0 12 0 Operation 0203 Checking DP operation panel and support U222 Setting the IC card type Other equipment Mode setting U250 Setting the maintenance cycle 200000 U251 Checking clearing the maintenance count 0 U252 Setting the destination U253 Switching between double and single counts Double count U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting Eject U285 Setting service status page On U332 Setting the size conversion factor 1 0 0 1 0 2 5 0345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication 0 U346 Selecting Sleep Mode On On Image U402 Adjust Print Margin 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 a
257. side is adjusted check the second side and if adjustment is required carry out the adjustment If the above adjustment does not optimize the center line proceed with the following mainte nance modes U065 P 1 3 19 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 27 Item No Description 2PV 2PW U203 Checking DP operation Description Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DP Purpose To check the DP operation Method 1 Press the start key 2 Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper 3 Select the speed to be operated using the cursor up down keys Display Description Normal Speed Normal reading 600 dpi High Speed High speed reading Press the start key Select the item to be operated using the cursor up down keys Display Description CCD ADP With paper single sided original of CCD CCD RADP With paper double sided original of CCD CCD ADP Non P Without paper single sided original of CCD continuous operation CCD RADP Non P Without paper double sided original of CCD continuous operation 6 Press the start key The operation starts 7 To stop continuous operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 28 Item No Description 2PV 2PW U222
258. start key to make a test copy 4 Press the system menu key 5 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in Display Description range setting value per step Main Scan Scanner magnification in the 32 to 127 O 0 1 main scanning direction Sub Scan Scanner magnification in the 25 to 25 0 1 auxiliary scanning direction Adjustment Main Scan 1 Change the setting value using the cursor left rigrt keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Increasing the setting enlarges the image and decreasing it narrows the image Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 4 2 Press the start key The value is set 1 3 19 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U065 Adjustment Sub Scan 1 Change the setting value using the left rigrt keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Increasing the value makes the image longer while decreasing the value makes the image shorter Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 5 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 20 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U066 Adjust Table Leading Edge Timing Description Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration of the origi
259. t margin 2 5 1 5 2 0 mm 2 5 1 5 2 0 mm Printer trailing edge margin 4 0 mm or less Figure 1 3 12 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the margins perform the following maintenance modes U034 P 1 3 17 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 38 Item No 2PV 2PW 2 Description U403 Adjust Scanning Margin Table Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original on the contact glass Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Press the system menu key 3 Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy 4 Press the system menu key 5 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in Display Description range setting value per step A Margin Scanner left margin 0 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm B Margin Scanner leading edge margin 0 0to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm C Margin Scanner right margin 0 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm D Margin Scanner trailing edge margin 0 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm 6 Change the setting value using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys Increasing the value makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower Leading edge margin of the copy image 4 0 1 5 1 0 mm Left margin of lt Right margin of the copy image the copy ima
260. t registered U00432 An subaddress based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because of a mis match in Subaddress confidential box numbers U00433 Subaddress based bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not present in the subaddress confidential box U00440 Subaddress based confidential reception was interrupted because the specified subad dress box was not registered U00450 The destination transmitter disconnected because the permit ID s did not agree with while the destination transmitter is in password check transmission or restricted trans mission U00460 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not registered U00462 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified encryption box was not registered 2 2 U006XX error code table Problems with the unit Error code Description U00601 Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum U00613 Image writing section problem U00656 Data was not transmitted to a modem error U00690 System error 2 3 U008XX error code table Page transmission error Error code Description U00800 A page transmission error occurred because of reception of a RTN or PIN signal U00811 A page transmission error reoccurred after retry of transmission in the ECM mode 2 4 U009XX error code table Page reception error Error
261. t section ER 2 1 21 2 1 8 Duplex CONVEYING section aia 2 1 23 2 1 9 Document PlOCESSOM certat Seen cash edie tit eds 2 1 25 1 Original feed Section 3 Ir EL 2 1 25 2 Original EEE E TAE EE 2 1 27 3 Original switchback eject 2 1 29 2 2 Electrical Parts Layout 2 2 1 Electrical parts layout me Uem e one Pe Reis 2 2 1 site e i lata aay 2 2 1 2 Switches and sersors eee tet e iR eie e mete re eg 2 2 4 3 MOTORS cai cidit 2 2 6 rep 2 2 8 by Document xt riu Paci beoe Hecate en dee Da Lb gt fet Page HL epi 2 2 9 2PV 2PW 2 3 Operation of the PWBs 2 3 1 Power source PWB end DE RR E E ere EE de Re at 2 3 1 2 3 2 Engine PWB Rd Rr delta m er pt b deed cad cee t peed 2 3 3 2 3 3 EIN c 2 3 13 2 3 4 Drum roay PWB e a EE Rene FS ER 2 3 20 2 3 5 DP drive PW Bis mirei inude e Ee ded e devia oae dua ea a ee deae he Papua 2 3 23 2 4 Appendixes 224 1 Appendixes iin eile vite dete dans 2 4 1 Ty Maintenance kit
262. taching and refitting the laser scanner unit Procedure 1 Remove the intermediate transfer unit see page 1 5 22 2 Remove drum units K M C Y and developing units K M C Y see page 1 5 21 19 3 Remove the rear upper cover right upper cover left upper cover and front cover see page 1 5 3 4 Remove the left rear cover and left cover see page 1 5 9 5 Remove two connectors YC32 YC32 from engine PWB 2PV 2PW Engine PWB Figure 1 5 67 6 Draw two connectors YC31 YC32 into the machine inside Figure 1 5 68 1 5 45 2PV 2PW 7 Remove the right rear cover right cover and right lower cover see page 1 5 6 8 Remove the controller shield see page 1 5 30 9 Remove two connectors YC38 YC40 from main PWB Main PWB Figure 1 5 69 10 Draw two connectors YC38 40 into the machine inside 5 s 2 Connectors YC38 YC40 2 Figure 1 5 70 1 5 46 2PV 2PW 11 Remove
263. talled Trial Presence or absence of UG 33 Installed Not Installed Presence or absence of the USB Keyboard Connected Not Connected Type of the USB Keyboard US English US English with Euro Page of relation to the A4 Letter Print Coverage provides close matching refer ence of toner consumption and will not match with the actual toner consumption Average coverage for total Black Cyan Magenta Yellow Average coverage for copy Black Cyan Magenta Yellow Average coverage for printer Black Cyan Magenta Yellow Average coverage for fax Black Cleared date and output date Coverage on the final output page 1 3 85 Service items 2PV 2PW 3 Description Description Supplement Number of rings Number of rings before auto matic switching Number of rings before connect ing to answering machine FRPO setting RP code Code the engine software version and the date of update RP code Code the main software version and the date of update RP code Code the engine software version and the date of the previous update RP code Code the main software version and the date of the previous update NV RAM version 1F3 1225 1F3 1225 b 9 0 a Consistency of the present software version and the database _ underscore OK Asterisk NG b Database version c The oldest time stamp of data
264. tem to be set using the cursor up down keys Display Description Cut Line 100 Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100 magnification Cut Line Auto Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in the auto reduction mode Cut Line A4 Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax A4R LetterR in the auto reduction mode Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100 magnification Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the record ing capacity when recording the data at 100 magnification If the number of excess lines is below the setting those lines are ignored If over the setting they are recorded on the next page 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Number of lines to be ignored when 0 to 22 3 16 lines receiving at 100 Increase the setting if a blank second page is output and decrease it if the received image does not include the entire transmitted data 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in the auto reduction mode Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the record ing capacity when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode If the number of
265. tenance count Also to clear the count during maintenance service replacing the maintenance kit Method 1 Press the start key The maintenance count is displayed Setting 1 Select M Cnt A using the cursor up down keys 2 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys Description Setting range Initial setting Maintenance count 0 to 9999999 0 3 Press the start key The count is set Clearing 1 Select Clear using the cursor up down keys 2 Press the start key The count is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 31 2PV 2PW 2 Item No Description U252 Setting the destination Description Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination Purpose To be executed after initializing the backup RAM in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the destination Display Description Inch Inch North America specifications Europe Metric Metric Europe specifications Asia Pacific Metric Asia Pacific specifications Australia Australia specifications China China specifications Korea Korea specifications 3 Press the start key 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Supplement The specified initial settings are provided according to the destinations in the mai
266. termediate transfer unit section The intermediate transfer unit section consists of the transfer cleaning unit the transfer belt and the four pri mary transfer rollers for respective color drums and forms a full color toner image by superimposing and transferring single color toner images formed on each drum onto the transfer belt Also with the ID sensors IDS mounted on the machine frame the toner density on the transfer belt is measured The transfer cleaning unit collects toner remaining on the transfer belt after secondary transfer and forwards it as waste toner to the waste toner box 11 8 6 5 4 3 2 Figure 2 1 16 Intermediate transfer unit section 1 Tension roller 7 Transfer belt 2 Drive roller 8 Cleaning fur brush 3 Primary transfer roller K 9 Cleaning roller 4 Primary transfer roller M 10 Cleaning blade 5 Primary transfer roller C 11 Cleaning screw 6 Primary transfer roller Y 12 ID sensors IDS 2 1 16 Cleaning bias 2PV 2PW gt o 8 S S a 2 e S S S S 2 gt gt gt s E E E E a EPWB d YC6 4 LEDREFL v4 2 YC6 2 1 VOPL vc4 4 YC6 1 L vc4 5 cut 11 5 GLONT YC7 4 LEDREFR vc4 2 TAYCNT vc 7 2 L YC1 4 vos YC11 13 YC7 1 YC1 5 1 IMAMOTREN dd IMAMOTCLK gt 15 1
267. tion section 1 Cassette paper feed section The cassette can contain 250 sheets The sheet from the cassette is pulled out by rotation of the pickup roller and sent to the paper conveying section by rotation of the paper feed roller Also the retard roller prevents mul tiple feeding of paper Figure 2 1 1 Cassette paper feed section 1 Pickup roller 7 Bottom plate 2 Paper feed roller 8 Lift work plate 3 Retard roller 9 Paper sensor PS 4 Retard cover 10 Actuator paper sensor 5 Retard lever 11 Lift sensor LS 6 Cassette base 12 Cassette PWB CPWB 2 1 1 EPWB YC21 3 YC21 4 YC3 3 YC27 1 YC3 6 YC3 7 YC3 8 2PV 2PW PAPVOL E LIFTSEN yc1 2 L9 L i FEDCLDRN no Ne LMOTDRN A 3 FEMOTRDYN FEMOTCLK FEMOTREN i Figure 2 1 2 Cassette paper feed section block diagram 2 1 2 2 MP tray paper feed section 2PV 2PW The MP tray can contain 50 sheets Feeding from the MP tray is performed by the rotation of the MP paper feed roller Also function of the MPF separation pad prevents paper from multiple feeding Figure 2 1 3 MP tray paper feed section MP paper feed roller MPF separation pad MPF bottom plate Friction pad MPF feed roller Feed pulley 7 MPF base 8 MPF cov
268. tion when A4 paper is set 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys Description Setting range Initial setting Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction 0 to 22 22 when A4 paper is set 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set 1 Change the setting using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys Description Setting range Initial setting Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction 0 to 26 26 when letter size paper is set 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 53 Item No 2PV 2PW Description U612 Setting system 3 Description Makes settings for fax transmission regarding operation and automatic printing of the protocol list This determines how trailing edge margin is detected to prevent image from being mutilated while printing a received Fax Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set using the cursor up down keys Display Description Auto Reduction Selects if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be per formed Protocol List Sets the automatic printing of the protocol list Detect Tra
269. tive connec Reinsert the connector Also check for conti paper feeder 1 tor cable or poor nuity within the connector cable If none The drum motor ready input is contact in the con replace the cable not given for 2 s during the PF nector PF paper feed motor and PF main PWB paper feed motor is ON YC6 Defective drive Check if the rollers and gears rotate transmission sys smoothly If not grease the bushes and tem of the PF gears Check for broken gears and replace if paper feed motor any Defective PF paper Replace the PF paper feed motor feed motor Defective PF main Replace the PF main PWB Refer to the ser PWB vice manual for the paper feeder 2610 PF paper feed motor error Defective connec Reinsert the connector Also check for conti paper feeder 2 The drum motor ready input is not given for 2 s during the PF paper feed motor is ON tor cable or poor contact in the con nector nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF paper feed motor and PF main PWB YC6 Defective drive transmission sys tem of the PF paper feed motor Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective PF paper feed motor Replace the PF paper feed motor Defective PF main PWB 1 4 15 Replace the PF main PWB Refer to the ser vice manual for the paper feeder Contents
270. to the locking hole of the scanner frame s machine right side After that confirm the edge of the ground spring is fitted to the groove F of the shaft 2PV 2PW 2 Groove fo locking the ISU drive belt Ry Figure 1 5 121 Locking hole Groove F Figure 1 5 122 1 5 75 61 Confirm the conductivity between the ground spring M and the machine right side s edge of the shaft Electric resistance 10Q or less 62 Affix two double sided tapes bundled in the ISU for service while aligning their edges to the engravings on the scanner frame 63 Affix the ISU side s folding part of the FFC wire to the double sided tapes 64 Refit the ISU cover and the operation cover in the reverse procedures of removal 2PV 2PW 2 Scanner unit inside Edge of the shaft at the machine right side Ground spring M Dabble sideed tape FFC wire Figure 1 5 123 1 5 76 2PV 2PW 2 Align the FFC wire at the main PWB side 65 Remove the left and right holders of the scanner unit at Step 20 21 and fully open the scanner unit FFC wire Figure 1 5 124 NN Wire holder viewed from the machine right side 66 Align the FFC wire like the figure to the right Seven alignment ribs and one ferrite core Figure 1 5 125 FFC wire 67 Insert the end of the FFC wire into the connector YC8 on the main PWB 68 Refit all the parts and the unit detached in the reverse manner of the above
271. tte 4 0508 No paper feed from duplex section 0509 No paper feed from MP tray 0511 Multiple sheets in cassette 1 0512 Multiple sheets in cassette 2 0513 Multiple sheets in cassette 3 0514 Multiple sheets in cassette 4 0518 Multiple sheets in duplex section 0519 Multiple sheets in MP tray 1020 MP feed sensor is turned ON 1403 PF feed sensor 1 does not turn ON Paper feeder 2 1404 PF feed sensor 1 does not turn ON Paper feeder 3 1413 PF feed sensor 1 does not turn OFF Paper feeder 2 1414 PF feed sensor 1 does not turn OFF Paper feeder 3 1420 PF feed sensor 1 is turned ON 1604 PF feed sensor 2 does not turn ON Paper feeder 3 1614 PF feed sensor 2 does not turn OFF Paper feeder 3 1 3 8 2PV 2PW Item No Description U000 Items Description Paper Jam 1620 PF feed sensor 2 is turned ON Log 1820 PF feed sensor 3 is turned ON 4002 Registration sensor does not turn ON Paper feeder 1 4003 Registration sensor does not turn ON Paper feeder 2 4004 Registration sensor does not turn ON Paper feeder 3 4009 Registration sensor does not turn ON MP tray 4012 Registration sensor does not turn OFF Paper feeder 1 4013 Registration sensor does not turn OFF Paper feeder 2 4014 Registration sensor does not turn OFF Paper feeder 3 4019 Registration sensor does not turn OFF MP tray 4020 Registration sensor is turned ON 4201 Eject sensor does not turn ON Cassette 4202 Eject sensor
272. tte PWB Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 27 15 The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present on the MP tray Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable MP paper sensor and engine PWB YC16 Deformed actuator of the MP paper sensor Check visually and replace if necessary Defective MP paper sensor Replace the MP paper sensor Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 27 16 The size of paper on the cassette is not displayed cor rectly Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Cassette size switch and engine PWB YC17 Defective cassette size switch Replace the cassette size switch Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 27 1 4 37 Problem Causes 2PV 2PW Check procedures corrective measures 17 A paper jam in the paper feed paper conveying or eject section is indi cated when the main power switch is turned on A piece of paper torn from paper is caught around registrat
273. tting communication control 1 Setting the communication starting speed Setting the reception speed Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiver 14400bps V17 14400bps 300 75 Setting communication control 2 Setting ECM transmission Setting ECM reception Setting the frequency of the CED signal 1 3 3 2PV 2PW Section Tem Content of maintenance item T No setting Fax U632 Setting communication control 3 Setting the DIS signal to 4 bytes Off Setting the CNG detection times in the fax telephone auto 2Time select mode 0633 Setting communication control 4 Enabling disabling V 34 communication On Setting the number of times of DIS signal reception On Setting the number of times of DIS signal reception Once Setting the reference for RTN signal output 15 U634 Setting communication control 5 0 U640 Setting communication time 1 Setting the one shot detection time for remote switching 7 Setting the continuous detection time for remote switching 80 U641 Setting communication time 2 Setting the TO time out time 56 Setting the T1 time out time 36 Setting the T2 time out time 69 Setting the Ta time out time 30 Setting the Tb1 time out time 20 Setting the Tb2 time out time 80 Setting the Tc time out time 60 Setting the Td time out time 9 120 V 6 220 240 V U650 Setting modem 1 Settin
274. tude 2 Charger roller correction 1to5 Configuring toner coverage counters 0 Full color count display 1 Color coverage count display Low coverage setting 0 1 to 100 0 Middle coverage setting 0 1 to 100 0 Toner low setting 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Toner low detection level 0 to 100 Full page print mode 0 Normal mode Factory setting 1 Full page mode Wake UP mode 0 OFF Don t wake up 1 ON Do wake up Wake Up Timer Displays the wake up time BAM conformity Mode setting 0 Un suiting Mode 1 Conformity Mode Drum serial number Black Cyan Magenta Yellow Code conversion 1 3 88 Service items 2PV 2PW 3 Description Network Status Printing a status page for network Description Prints a status page for network Purpose To acquire the detailed network setting information Method 1 Enter the Service Setting menu 2 Select Network Status using the cursor up down keys 3 Press the start key 4 Press Yes the Left Select key Network status page will be printed Completion Press the stop key 1 3 89 Service items 2PV 2PW Description Test Page Printing a test page Description Four colors are printed respectively with halftones of three different levels Purpose To check the activation of the developer and drum units of four colors Method 1 Enter the Service Settin
275. uity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Drum motor and engine PWB YC13 Defective drive transmission sys tem of the drum motor Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective drum motor Replace the drum motor Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Fuser pressure release motor error When the fuser pressure release motor is driven the motor over current detection signal is detected continu ously for 8 times 800 ms at 100 ms intervals Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Fuser pressure release motor and engine PWB YC38 Defective drive transmission sys tem of the fuser pressure release motor Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective fuser pressure release motor Replace the fuser pressure release motor Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Fuser pressure release motor time out error When the fuser pressure release motor is driven the envelope switch EVSW is not detectable for 6 s Defective
276. unication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after transmission of INFOO before entering phase primary channel equivalent device training For example INFOO A Abar B Bbar for polling transmission INFOh was not detected U01720 A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after initiating the control channel before entering the T 30 process For example PPh ALT MPh E was not detected U01721 In the absence of a common communication speed between units including when an impossible combination of communication speed and symbol speed occurs after MPh exchange 1 a DCN sig nal was received from the destination unit and the line was cut or 2 a DIS NSF CSI signal was received from the destination unit and in response to the signal the unit transmitted a DCN signal and the line was cut 2 8 U018XX error code table V 34 reception Error code Description U01800 A communication error occurred in phase 2 line probing U01810 A communication error occurred in phase 3 primary channel equivalent device training U01820 A communication error occurred in phase 4 modem parameter exchange U01821 Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed between units U01800 A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after transmission of INFOO before entering phase primary channel equivalent device training Fo
277. unit Y see page 1 5 21 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27 Broken fuser heater wire The detected temperature of fuser thermistor does not rise 1 C 1 8 F after the fuser heater has been turned on continuously for 10 s in warm ing up The fuser temperature does not reach 100 C 212 F after the fuser heater has been turned on continuously for 30 s in warming up The detected temperature of fuser thermistor does not reach the specified tempera ture ready indication temper ature after the fuser heater has been turned on continu ously for 60 s in warming up The detected temperature of fuser thermistor does not rise 1 C 1 8 F after the fuser heater has been turned on continuously for 10 s during printing Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Fuser heater and power source PWB YC102 Fuser unit and eject PWB YC3 Eject PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC19 Deformed connec tor pin See page 1 4 22 Defective triac See page 1 4 22 Fuser thermostat triggered Reinsert the fuser unit see page 1 5 26 Broken fuser heater wire Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 26 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 27
278. ury acidic of alkaline vapors inorganic gasses NOx SOx gases and chlorine based organic sol vents Select a well ventilated location 6 Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine T 400 mm 15 3 4 ZA VN cu 4 2 5 2 a to 300 300 300 600 11 13 16 11 13 16 11 13 16 23 5 8 Figure 1 2 1 1 2 1 2PV 2PW 1 2 2 Unpacking Unpacking 220 240 V AC model Figure 1 2 2 1 Machine 10 Rear pad 19 Toner containers 2 Outer case 11 Top pad L 20 Plastic bags 200 x 450 3 Machine cover 620 x 580 12 Top pad R 21 Plastic bag 250 x 600 4 Bottom spacer 13 Plastic bag 240 x 350 22 Operation labels 5 Plastic bag 650 x 650 14 Installation guide etc 23 Operation label pad 6 Left spacer 15 CD ROM 24 Modular cable 7 Bottom pads 16 Middle spacer 25 Hinge joints 8 Bottom case 17 Power cord 240 V AC model only 9 Front pad 18 Waste toner box 4 in 1 model with FAX only 1 2 2 2PV 2PW 120 V AC model Figure 1 2 3 1 Machine 10 Front pad 19 Waste toner box 2 Outer case 11 Rear pad 20 Toner containers 3 Machine cover 620 x 580 12 Top padL 21 Plastic bags 200 x 450 4 Bottom spacer 13 Top pad R
279. y under the USB memory Insert the USB memory in which the firmware was copied in the USB mem ory slot Perform steps 3 to 8 on the previous page Turn the main power switch on Perform maintenance item U000 Print a maintenance report to check that the version of ROM U019 has been upgraded f 1 6 2 2PV 2PW 3 FW Update Error FFFF USB memory Figure 1 6 2 2PV 2PW 1 6 2 Remarks on engine PWB replacement When replacing the engine PWB remove the EEPROM U1 from the engine PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new engine PWB EEPROM co L Engine PWB Figure 1 6 3 1 6 3 2PV 2PW 2 1 1 Paper feed conveying section Paper feed conveying section consists of the paper feed unit that feeds paper from the cassette and the MP tray paper feed unit that feeds paper from the MP tray and the paper conveying section that conveys the fed paper to the transfer separa
280. ygon motor CY Drives the polygon mirror CY Developing release motor DEVRM Drives separation of developing units M C and Y LSU cleaning motor LSUCM Drives LSU dust shield glass cleaning system Fuser pressure release motor FPRM Drives fuser pressure release Left fan motor LFM Cools the interior of machine Right fan motor RFM Cools the interior of machine 2 2 6 2PV 2PW 2PV 2PW 18 Controller fan motor Cools the controller section 19 Fuser fan motor Cools the toner container section 20 Container fan motor Cools the toner container section 21 ISU motor 150 Drives the ISU 2 2 7 2PV 2PW 4 Others Machine right 22 Machine inside jj Machine left 2 4 Others Figure 2 Primary paper feed from cassette Controls the drive of MP conveying section Controls the secondary paper feed 1 Paper feed clutch PFCL 2 MP feed clutch MPFCL 3 Registration clutch RCL Controls the drive of conveying section Controls the MP bottom plate 4 Middle clutch 5 MP solenoid MPSOL Eliminates the residual electrostat

ECOSYS M6026cdn ECOSYS M6526cdn

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents